Skip to main content

Full text of "Audio-visual techniques for enrichment of the curriculum"

See other formats


AUDIO  -V  I  8  UAL 


TECH  N  I  Q  U  E  S 


From  the  collection  of  the 

^        m 

o  Prepnger 

V    iJibrary 
♦         p 


San  Francisco,  California 
2006 


% 


%. 


% 


■%7 


c 


AUDIO-VISUAL  TECHNIQUES    FOR 
ENRICHMENT  OF  THE  CURRICULUM 


AUDIO-VISUAL 
TECHNIQUES 

For  Enricnment  oi 
the  C^urriculum 


by 

ANNA  CURTIS  CHANDLER,  EJ.  D. 

and 

IRENE  F.  CYPHER,  PL  D. 


NOBLE   AND    NOBLE,  Putlisliers,  Inc.,  New  York 


COPYRIGHT,    1948,   BY  NOBLE   AND  NOBLE,   PUBLISHERS,   INC 
MANUFACTURED    IN    THE    U.S.A. 


CONTENTS 


INTRODUCTION  Vll 

I.  AUDIO-VISUAL    ENRICHMENT  3 

II.  AIDS     IN    WAR    AND    PEACE  13 

III.  TYPICAL    CLASSROOM    AIDS  IQ 

IV.  RADIO    AND    TELEVISION  49 
EXAMPLE    OF     PROGRAM  53 

V.  DRAMATIC    PRESENTATIONS  67 

VI.  TREASURE    TRIPS  75 
EXAMPLEOFTRIP  80 

VII.  THREE-DIMENSIONAL    AIDS    AND 

RE  ALIA  85 

VIII.  HOME-     AND    SCHOOL-MADE    AIDS  97 

IX.  ENRICHMENT    OF     SOCIAL     STUDIES  II3 

X.  UNDERSTANDING  WORLD  CULTURE  123 
EXAMPLE  OF  SCHEDULE  125 
EXAMPLES     OF     PROGRAMS  1 30 

XI.  ENRICHMENT     OF    LANGUAGE    ARTS  137 
EXAMPLE     OF     PROGRAM  142 

XII.  ENRICHMENT    OF    THE     SCIENCES  169 
EXAMPLES    OF    PROGRAMS  178 

XIII.  PLANNING    THE    AUDIO-VISUAL 
PROGRAM  191 

XIV.  CREATIVE    ACHIEVEMENTS  203 

XV.  TEACHER    EDUCATION  213 

XVI.  WHERE    TO    OBTAIN    HELP  219 
GLOSSARY  243 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2006  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/audiovisualtechnOOchanrich 


INTRODUCTION 

THIS  BOOK  is  a  real  contribution  to  modern  education, 
both  in  its  theory,  and  in  its  practice.  .      . 

The  authors'  conception  of  audio-visual  enrichment  is  not 
a  narrow-minded  attitude,  but  "entails  a  grasp  of  the  inter- 
relationship of  various  areas  in  the  curriculum  and  the  care- 
ful selection  of  these  aids  vs^hich  are  so  potent  in  enriching 
them/* 

This  broad  meaning  of  audio-visual  enrichment  does  not 
restrict  itself  to  elementary  and  secondary  schools,  but  it  is 
also  good  for  pre-school  education  as  well  as  for  adult  edu- 
cation beyond  secondary  institutions,  regardless  of  the  cur- 
riculum. As  the  authors  say,  "Audio-visual  enrichment  means 
the  realization  that  one  area  cannot  be  taught  alone,  that  this 
integration  and  enrichment  must  cause  the  learning  experi- 
ence to  become  vital,  human,  sensory,  through  related  areas." 

All  these  areas  will  appeal  to  children,  youths,  and  adults 
on  the  basis  which  Dr.  Thomas  M.  Balliet  (former  Dean  of 
the  N.Y.U.  School  of  Pedagogy)  called  sensory-motor  train- 
ing, illustrating  the  well-known  principle  that  all  impressions 
( stimuli )  strive  for  expressions  ( doings ) ,  and  lead  to  reflec- 
tive and  creative  thinking. 

According  to  the  authors,  the  term  "audio-visual  aids"  in- 
cludes not  only  the  motion  picture  and  the  lantern  slide,  but 
a  rich  store  of  all  materials  for  educational  stimuli  from  A 
to  Z,  such  as  anaglyphs,  aquaria,  blackboard-chalk,  bulletin 


INTRODUCTION 

boards,  cartoons,  charts,  clubs,  comics,  costumes,  creative 
achievements,  dancing,  dioramas,  demonstrations,  discus- 
sions, dolls,  dramatics,  field  trips,  filmstrips  or  filmslides,  flat 
pictures,  furniture,  graphs,  illustrated  talks,  kodachrome 
slides,  live  animals  and  plants,  maps,  miniature  stage-sets, 
modeled  figures,  murals,  nature  specimens,  objects,  photo- 
graphs, pictures  (plain  and  colored),  radio,  relics,  sandbox 
scenes,  school  "movies,"  stamps,  stereographs,  story-telling, 
tableaux,  television,  terraria,  vectographs,  and  visits  to  the 
zoo! 

Our  authors  claim  that  children  from  their  first  birth  to 
their  "second  birth"  ( at  the  age  of  14  years ) ,  youths  from  14 
to  21  years,  and  adults  from  21  years  up  should  be  trained 
and  educated  as  a  whole  by  means  of  all  available  audio- 
visual and  other  sensory-motor  aids,  designated  for  the  si- 
multaneous development  of  hand,  heart  and  head;  and  all 
leading  to  a  wise  world  in  the  near  or  distant  future,  since  "a 
nation  without  vision  must  perish,"  to  use  the  Biblical  ex- 
pression. 

In  other  words,  the  authors  are  trying  by  their  multiferous 
audio-visual  aids  to  avoid  that  education  which  was  narrow 
and  one-sided,  exercising  and  developing  certain  abilities 
and  human  attributes  at  the  expense  of  the  rest.  The  avowed 
aim  of  the  writers  of  this  book  is  to  point  the  way  to  the  best 
possible  means  of  education  for  World  Citizenship. 

The  practical  side  of  this  book  is  still  more  interesting, 
and  its  merits  include  almost  all  the  good  hints  offered  by 
great  educators  to  help  the  students  learn  their  lessons  more 
viii 


INTRODUCTION 


economically  and  efficiently,  beginning  with  Comenius'  Orbis 
Pictus  up  to  the  most  recent  book  on  visual  aids  published 
today. 

This  book  is  full  of  practical  examples  of  the  uses  of  specific 
aids,  and  advice  on  where  to  obtain  help  in  acquiring  audio- 
visual materials,  plus  a  careful  and  useful  glossary.  The 
aiuthors  offer,  also,  six  practical  points  to  bear  in  mind  in 
selecting  and  using  audio- visual  aids;  fourteen  values  of 
audio- visual  aids  when  eflFectively  used  in  teaching;  and  five 
dangers  to  avoid  in  using  audio- visual  aids. 

This  book  should  be  in  the  hands  not  only  of  good  teachers 
in  all  grades  from  kindergarten  to  university,  but  also  should 
be  consulted  by  all  others  who  are  interested  in  helping  to 
develop  a  modern,  ideal  and  useful  American  culture  and 
civilization. 

Paul  R.  Radosavljevich, 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Experimental  Education. 

New  York  University  School  of  Education 


ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.  The  authors  wish  to  acknowledge 
their  indebtedness  to  the  following:  The  Professors  of  New  York 
University  who  have  been  especially  helpful  in  this  field:  Dan  W. 
Dodson,  John  Carr  DuflF,  Hughes  Mearns,  Henri  C.  Olinger;  and 
especially  to  Daniel  C.  Knowlton  and  Paul  R.  Radosavljevich. 

The  aid  given  by  the  following  institutions  is  also  deeply  appreci- 
ated: The  American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  the  Metropolitan 
Museum  of  Art,  the  Museum  of  the  City  of  New  York,  Hunter  Col- 
lege and  Hunter  College  Elementary  School  of  the  City  of  New 
York,  the  Board  of  Education  of  the  City  of  New  York,  the  Franklin 
Institute  of  Philadelphia,  the  Cathedral  of  St.  John  the  Divine  of 
New  York  City;  the  United  States  Navy  Developing  Center. 

The  authors  value  the  assistance  of  the  following:  Dr.  Grace 
Fisher  Ramsey,  Curator  of  School  Relations,  the  American  Museum 
of  Natural  History;  Dr.  George  N.  Shuster,  President  of  Hunter 
College;  Dr.  Charles  Russell,  Chairman,  Dept.  of  Education,  the 
American  Museum  of  Natural  History;  Prof.  Philip  R.  V.  Curoe, 
Chairman  of  the  Dept.  of  Education,  and  Dr.  Frank  T.  Wilson, 
Coordinator,  Hunter  College;  Dr.  Florence  Brumbaugh,  Principal 
of  Hunter  College  Elementary  School,  and  the  Audio- Visual  Par- 
ent Committee  of  that  school;  George  Colclough  of  Roelif  Jansen 
Central  School;  Beatrice  Frederiksen  of  Roosevelt  School,  Hyde 
Park,  N.  Y.;  Anna  M.  Montgomery,  Ellen  Kerr,  Michael  J.  Kenny 
and  Julius  Postal,  all  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  His- 
tory; Arnold  Spitz  of  the.  Franklin  Institute;  George  Schiebler  of 
the  Board  of  Education  of  the  City  of  New  York;  Charlotte  Chan- 
dler Wells;  Teresa  Bergamo  Zazzali;  and  Roy  E.  Stryker  of  the 
Standard  Oil  Company. 


PICTURE  CREDITS.  The  authors  wish  to  express  their 
appreciation  and  gratitude  to  the  many  institutions  and  corpora- 
tions which  provided  pictures  for  inclusion  in  this  book.  They 
wish  to  thank  in  particular  the  following: 

All  The  Children,  publication  of  the  New  York  City  Board  of 
Education,  for  the  photographs  on  pages  9,  15,  18,  22,  45,  48,  71, 
78,  103,  105,  109,  110,  112,  168,  190,  202,  204  and  212. 
American  Optical  Company  for  the  photograph  appearing  on 
page  31. 

The  American  Museum  of  Natural  History  for  the  photographs 
on  pages  2,  84,  93,  122,  125,  195,  206,  and  the  frontispiece. 
Ampro  Corporation  for  the  photograph  on  page  37. 
Bausch  and  Lomb  Optical  Company  for  the  photograph  appear- 
ing on  page  29. 

Bell  and  Howell  Company  for  the  photographs  on  pages  96  and 
198. 

British  Information  Services  for  the  photographs  on  pages  145 
and  148. 

Columbia  Broadcasting  System  for  the  photograph  on  page  53. 
Don  Lee  Television  System  for  the  photographs  on  pages  140 
and  175. 

The  Franklin  Institute  and  Gladys  MuUer  for  the  photographs  on 
pages  178  and  183. 

Grace  Line  for  the  photograph  on  page  133. 
Hunter  College  Elementary  School  for  the  photographs  on  pages 
7,  90  and  91. 

The  Jam  Handy  Organization  for  the  photograph  appearing  on 
page  33. 

xi 


The  keystone  View  Company  for  the  photograph  on  page  35. 
The  Metropohtan  Museum  of  Art  for  the  photographs  on  pages 
69,  80,  83,  116,  136  and  153. 

The  Museum  of  the  City  of  New  York  for  the  photographs  on 
pages  107  and  119. 

The  New  York  World-Telegram  and  Al  Aumuller  for  the  photo- 
graph on  page  74. 

Pan  American  Airways  System  for  the  photograph  on  page  130. 
Standard  Oil  Company  of  New  Jersey  for  the  photographs  on 
pages  41,  43,  171,  and  218. 

Underwood  and  Underwood  for  the  photograph  appearing  on 
page  186. 

United  Artists  for  the  scenes  from  "Henry  V"  on  pages  142,  158 
and  164. 

United  Nations  Department  of  PubUc  Information  for  the  photo- 
graph appearing  on  page  76. 

The  United  States  Navy  for  the  photograph  on  page  12. 
Weber  Costello  Company  for  the  photograph  on  page  25. 


xii 


I.  AudioA^isual  Enricnment 


VISUAL  AIDS  and  audio- visual  aids  are  familiar  terms  in 
the  realm  of  education.  For  some  years  they  have  been  widely 
used,  enthusiastically  discussed  and  evaluated.  Long  before 
World  War  II  these  aids  were  used  by  museums  in  integrated 
programs.  They  early  recognized  the  educational  possibilities 
of  flat  pictures,  slides,  stereographs,  motion  pictures  and  dio- 
ramas as  incentives  to  the  understanding  and  enjoyment 
of  "realia"— their  gallery  treasures.  Schools  recognized  their 
value,  also,  but  in  1936  only  four  percent  were  equipped 
with  projectors,  and  four  years  later,  in  1940,  not  more  than 
ten  percent.  Although  in  recent  years  the  appropriation  for 
"visual  instruction"  in  schools  has,  in  many  cities,  been  in- 
creased, more  funds  are  needed  for  proper  school  use  of  these 
aids. 

A  great  impetus  in  the  use  of  these  teaching  tools  came 
through  «their  extensive  and  intensive  use  in  World  War  II  for 
speedy  and  effective  training  of  men  and  women  in  both  mili- 
tary and  industrial  skills.  With  the  war  over,  many  used  pro- 
jectors were  sold  at  reduced  prices.  Many  films  prepared  by 
our  Government  became  available.  More  schools  are  able  to 
use  this  significant  method  of  teaching.  With  our  naval,  mili- 
tary, and  industrial  centers  realizing  the  potency  of  this 
teaching  method,  our  educators  will  understand  more  than 
ever  before  how  necessary  these  aids  are  in  the  education  of 
our  boys  and  girls  in  democracy  and  world-understanding. 
They  will  realize,  also,  how  necessary  these  audio-visual 

3 


AUDIO-VISUAL 
ENRICHMENT 

aids  are  in  the  integration  of  the  various  areas  of  the  curriculum 
—Social  Studies,  Language  Arts,  the  Sciences,  Art,  Music, 
and  Dramatics. 

Long  ago  educators  realized  the  value  of  visual  enrichment, 
not  as  a  separate  subject,  or  a  teaching  project,  but  as  an 
eflFective,  vital,  teaching  method,  providing  for  the  presenta- 
tion of  knowledge  through  the  seeing  experience.  Audio-visual 
enrichment  is  not  entertainment,  but  a  vital  part  of  the  cur- 
riculum. 

Today,  with  the  sound  motion  picture,  the  radio,  and  the 
recordings  which  now  accompany  many  of  the  filmstrips, 
the  hearing  experience  combines  with  the  seeing,  and  audio- 
visual impressions  result  in  still  more  meaningful  teaching  and 
functional  learning.  Other  senses  are  also  important  in  learn- 
ing, especially  that  of  touch,  the  sense  earliest  aroused.  In 
some  learning  situations  the  sense  of  smell  and  that  of  taste 
are  eflFective,  also.  So,  we  may  speak  of  certain  combinations 
of  these  aids  as  multi-sensory  rather  than  audio- visual  aids. 
These  are  especially  meaningful  to  young  children. 

What  are  these  aids  which  contribute  to  happy  and  eflFective 
learning  through  the  enrichment  and  integration  of  the  vari- 
ous areas  in  the  curriculum?  Which  present  knowledge 
through  the  eyes  and  the  ears?  They  include  charts,  maps, 
books,  flat  pictures,  slides,  filmstrips,  motion  pictures,  radio, 
television,  stereographs,  models,  dioramas,  realia,  recordings, 
phonograph  records,  lectures,  story-hours,  demonstrations, 
tableaux  and  dramatics. 
4 


SELECTION 
OF    AIDS 

SELECTION  AND  COMBINATION  OF  AIDS.  The 
mere  showing  of  these  aids  does  not  mean  effective  audio- 
visual enrichment.  That  entails  a  grasp  of  the  interrelation- 
ship of  various  areas  in  the  curriculum  and  careful  and  intelli- 
gent selection  of  these  aids  which  are  so  potent  in  enriching 
them.  Audio- visual  enrichment  means  the  realization  that  one 
area  cannot  be  taught  alone,  that  this  integration  and  enrich- 
ment must  cause  the  learning  experience  to  become  vital, 
human,  sensory,  through  related  areas.  The  challenge  for 
more  care  and  deeper  understanding  in  the  selection  of  these 
aids,  for  quality,  authenticity  and  vividness  of  appeal,  is  in- 
creasing with  the  greater  demands  for  this  effective  method 
which  produces  more  learning  in  less  time— and  happy  learn- 
ing. 

Not  only  quality,  authenticity,  fitness  and  vividness  of  ap- 
peal in  relation  to  the  content  of  the  curriculum  area  or  areas 
are  important  in  the  selection  of  these  aids,  but  an  understand- 
ing of  their  relative  advantages  in  different  teaching  situa- 
tions. This  relative  advantage  of  each  aid  and  of  combinations 
of  aids  must  be  considered  in  connection  with  each  teaching 
and  learning  situation. 

The  teacher  herself,  and  under  her  guidance,  the  teacher- 
in-training  or  pupil,  should  understand  how  to  evaluate 
the  authenticity,  quality  and  relationship  of  these  concrete 
teaching  aids,  and  the  advantage  of  each  type  or  com- 
bination. She  may  feel  that  appeal  to  the  eye  is  sufficient 
in  a  given  learning  situation  or  she  may  decide  that  appeal 

5 


AUDIO-VISUAL 
ENRICHMENT 


to  the  ear  is  also  needed  for  the  best  presentation  of 
her  subject  matter.  Again,  after  careful  evaluation  of  the 
various  aids  available,  she  may  be  convinced  that  three- 
dimensional  objects,  models  and  dioramas,  or  three-dimen- 
sional pictures— stereographs— will  make  a  more  concrete 
and  realistic  impression  upon  the  children  since  they 
stimulate  the  sense  of  touch  which  is  strong  in  everyone,  espe- 
cially in  children.  Today,  polaroid  filters  make  it  possible  to 
project  three-dimensional  pictures  in  color.  These  three- 
dimensional  visual  aids  enable  boys  and  girls  to  feel  more 
completely  the  reality  of  the  experience  and  actually  to  partici- 
pate in  it.  Or,  she  may  feel  that  the  projection  of  slides  com- 
bined with  the  motion  picture  will  make  the  learning  situation 
more  vital.  In  each  case,  the  choice  of  audio-visual  aids  must 
be  suited  to  the  purpose  of  the  lesson. 


HAPPY  LEARNING  IN  RELATED  AREAS.  Since 
effective  learning  is  secured  only  through  effective  teach- 
ing, that  method  or  those  methods  of  teaching  should 
be  used  which  bring  to  the  child  most  eflFectively  and 
economically  the  desired  results.  An  important  outcome  is  a 
joyous  attitude  towards  learning  as  well  as  the  ability  to  ex- 
perience the  content  in  learning  with  resultant  experiences 
which  help  him  develop  into  a  happy,  active  individual,  able 
to  live  with  himself  and  with  society.  Audio-visual  enrichment 
of  the  curriculum  as  a  teaching  method  stimulates  thinking, 
6 


LEARNING  IN 
RELATED  AREAS 


quickens  creative  imagination,  helps  the  child  become  ori- 
ented to  the  material  which  is  presented  to  him.  It  calls  forth 
spontaneous,  enthusiastic  and  creative  responses  from  boys 
and  girls  who  are  eager  to  see,  to  hear,  to  touch,  to  experience, 
who  have  great  capacity  for  wonder  and  discovery,  and  for 
free  and  joyous  expression.  Integrated,  enriched  programs 
made  possible  by  audio-visual  aids,  change  the  curriculum 
from  stereotyped,  formal,  verbal  learning  in  unrelated  areas 
to  vital  and  happy  learning  in  related  areas  with  provision  for 


A  student-teacher  showing  color  prints  to  children— a  visual  experi- 
ence stimulating  an  appreciation  of  art  and  creative  expression. 


AUDIO-VISUAL 
ENRICHMENT 


individual  thinking,  feeling  and  doing  in  life-like  situations 
and  dynamic  experiences. 

Audio-visual  aids,  like  art,  music,  dramatics  and  the  dance, 
are  a  common  language,  a  common  denominator  among  all 
people.  They  help  develop  and  increase  personal  understand- 
ing and  appreciation  of  the  areas  of  learning  which  they  hu- 
manize and  enrich.  They  develop  a  better  understanding  of 
their  relationship  and  of  the  interrelationship  of  all  countries 
in  the  world  today. 

Technical  advance  in  the  production  of  audio-visual  aids 
has  been  great,  fine  equipment  is  ready,  information  for  its 
use  is  at  hand.  The  specific  challenge  is  the  school  budget. 
How  ideal  the  situation  would  be  if  each  school  might  have 
suflBcient  appropriation  for  an  audio-visual  room  with  ade- 
quate equipment,  and  a  teacher  trained  in  the  selection  and 
use  of  these  aids,  who  would  be  in  charge  of  this  work  without 
the  burden  of  other  teaching  duties.  For  the  success  of  this 
enrichment  depends  largely  upon  an  understanding  of  what 
to  use  and  how  and  when  to  use  it.  Such  a  person  would  con- 
trol and  direct  the  successful  distribution  of  these  aids  in  the 
various  classrooms  at  the  time  they  are  needed,  for  only  thus 
can  they  be  effective  in  making  the  various  areas  vital  and 
meaningful. 

There  are  educational,  governmental,  and  commercial 
sources,  where  a  helping  hand  is  available  in  the  selecting  of 
these  aids.  Much  material  for  school  use  can  be  procured  at 
no  expense;  much  at  special  rates.  For  many  children  trips  to 
8 


LEARNING  IN 
RELATED  AREAS 


Museums  contain  many  awe-inspiring  evidences  of  life  long  ago, 
such  as  this  huge  skeleton  of  a  carnivorous  dinosaur. 


AUDIO-VISUAL 
ENRICHMENT 


museums  and  libraries,  historical  monuments,  factories,  botan- 
ical gardens,  shops,  or  dairies,  with  their  original  material  in 
proper  settings,  make  it  possible  for  the  learning  situation 
to  be  the  real  experience. 


WHAT  TO  KEEP  IN  MIND 

I.    VALUE    OF    AUDIO-VISUAL    AIDS— WHEN    EFFECTIVELY 
USED  IN  TEACHING 

1.  Lessen  major  weakness  of  verbalism. 

2.  Humanize  and  vitalize  subject  matter. 

3.  Provide  interesting  approach  to  new  topics  and  give  correct 
initial  impression. 

4.  Provide  happy  learning. 

5.  Economize  time  in  learning. 

6.  Increase  ability  of  retention. 

7.  Aid  in  developing  keen  observation. 

8.  Supply  concrete  material  needed. 

9.  Stimulate  initiative  of  pupils  in  making  materials. 

10.  Stimulate  creative  responses  in  pupils. 

11.  Provide  the  best  substitute  for  real  experience. 

12.  Stimulate  interest  and  aid  in  self-expression. 

13.  Enrich  and  clarify  instruction. 

14.  Help  in  orienting  the  child  to  the  world  in  which  he  lives. 
10 


WHAT    TO 
KEEP    IN    MIND 

II.  POINTS    TO     BEAR     IN     MIND     WHEN    SELECTING    AND 
USING   AUDIO-VISUAL   AIDS 

1.  Audio-visual  teaching  aids  must  have  some  direct  relation 
to  lesson  (they  must  not  be  mere  entertainment). 

2.  Audio-visual  aids  should  be  so  selected  as  to  supplement 
and  enrich  various  areas  in  the  curriculum. 

3.  Audio-visual  aids  should  be  adapted  to  grade  level. 

4.  Audio-visual  aids  should  be  selected,  combined  and  used  in 
a  way  which  vdll  be  most  effective  for  a  particular  lesson. 

5.  Audio-visual  aids  are  not  a  separate  subject  but  a  vital  teach- 
ing method. 

6.  Preview  all  types  of  audio-visual  materials  before  using  in 
class. 

III.  DANGERS  TO  AVOID  IN  USE  OF  AUDIO-VISUAL  AIDS 

1.  Material  unsuited  to  a  particular  teaching  situation. 

2.  Too  much  material  used  at  one  time. 

3.  Use  of  materials  poor  in  quality. 

4.  Use  of  materials  unsuited  to  child's  mental  level. 

5.  Failure  to  integrate  the  various  aids  to  the  teaching  situa- 
tion or  to  the  curriculum. 


11 


II.  Aids  in  War  and  Peac 


DURING  WORLD  WAR  II,  audio-visual  aids,  or,  as  they 
were  called  in  the  armed  forces,  "Training  Aids,"  were 
vital  in  eflFective  and  speedy  training  of  men  and  women  in 
military  and  industrial  knowledges  and  skills.  Never  before 
did  a  war  require  so  much  learning  and  training— training  of 
soldiers,  sailors,  aviators,  marines,  wacs,  waves,  spars  and 
workers  in  industrial  units.  These  aids  saved  time  in  our  train- 
ing camps,  producing  the  desired  results  in  the  most  eflFective 
and  economical  way.  Pictures  of  war  activities  and  techniques 
could  be  shown  to  classes  of  all  sizes,  providing  the  equipment 
and  room  facilities  were  adequate,  so  that  all  might  see  and 
hear  to  the  best  advantage. 

Many  sound  motion  pictures,  filmstrips,  both  silent  and 
with  recordings,  glass  and  kodachrome  slides,  stereographs, 
charts,  maps,  posters,  photographs,  models— both  solid,  cuta- 
way, and  with  movable  parts— were  prepared  by  experts  for 
our  Government.  These  proved  an  outstanding  success  in  the 
rapid  and  successful  training  of  men  in  the  armed  forces  and 
civilian  war- workers. 

These  Training  Aids  were  helpful  in  orientation,  in  better 
understanding  of  the  causes  of  the  war,  in  the  realization  of 
the  close  relationship  of  civilian  war-workers  to  those  in  the 
armed  forces.  They  helped  ground,  sea,  and  air  troops 
understand  the  terrain  of  various  combat  areas.  They  were 
vital  in  teaching  how  to  give  first  aid  to  sick  and  wounded 
comrades.  They  swiftly  and  eflFectively  trained  the  men  to 

13 


AIDS    IN    WAR 
AND    PEACE 

recognize  instantly  enemy  aircraft  and  taught  skills  in  operat- 
ing complicated  machinery.  They  built  up  morale  by  inspiring 
confidence  in  ability  to  "carry  on"  in  various  combat  areas.  In 
addition,  they  were  indispensable  in  training  personnel  for 
mass  production,  since  they  enabled  the  trainees  to  feel  a  real- 
istic and  actual  participation. 

AUDIO-VISUAL  AIDS  IN  PEACE.  Teachers  will  read- 
ily appreciate  that  these  training  aids  and  audio-visual  tech- 
niques, which  were  so  effective  in  wartime,  are  equally  effec- 
tive in  peacetime  education. 

Today  we  are  discussing  peace  in  world  terms.  Time  and 
distance,  the  greatest  barriers  to  an  understanding  of  various 
peoples,  can  be  bridged  by  this  effective  method.  Like  a  magic 
carpet,  audio- visual  aids  can  take  our  boys  and  girls  to  remote 
corners  of  the  earth— or  bring  the  world  to  the  classroom.  They 
can  make  possible  a  visit  to  the  very  homes  of  our  near  and  far 
neighbors,  and  cover  more  ground  in  a  shorter  period  of  time 
than  can  be  traversed  by  any  other  kind  of  transportation, 
even  our  swiftest  airplanes.  The  better  our  boys  and  girls,  for 
whose  happiness  in  the  world  of  tomorrow  hosts  of  soldiers 
have  fought  and  died,  understand  the  people  of  other  coun- 
tries, their  culture  and  ideals,  the  more  likely  it  is  that  they 
will  be  able  to  live  together  in  peace. 

PROMOTE  WORLD  UNITY.  Visual,  audio,  and  audio- 
visual programs  whether  on  the  air,  or  in  classrooms  and 
auditoriums,  will  no  longer  be  called  the  "Americana  Series," 
14 


PROMOTE    WORLD 
UNITY 

fostering  Americanism  alone,  but  rather  "The  World  of  To- 
day Series/'  furthering  World  unity.  Ideals  of  democracy, 
knowledge  of,  and  pride  in,  the  builders  of  our  democracy  and 
their  achievements  both  yesterday  and  today  will  be  pre- 
sented to  our  boys  and  girls,  in  connection  with  ideals  and 

A  bulletin  board  can  be  used  effectively  to  display  graphically  the 
common  interests  of  diverse  nations,  and  the  blending  of  these  into 
one  world. 


15 


AIDS    IN    WAR 
AND    PEACE 

achievements  of  other  countries  and  their  leaders.  The  impor- 
tance of  common  languages,  similar  interests,  desires  and 
goals  cannot  be  overemphasized.  Audio- visual  aids  will  help 
bring  full  realization  of  the  fact  that  we  are  all  human  individ- 
uals belonging  to  one  world,  preparing  for  a  lasting  peace. 

THERAPEUTIC  VALUE.  These  "common  denominators" 
—art,  music,  the  dance,  dramatics,  audio-visual  aids— have  an- 
other important  function  in  peacetime  education.  They  have 
a  therapeutic  value  which  must  not  be  underestimated  or 
neglected.  Programs  enriched  by  audio-visual  aids  will  help 
relieve  the  tension  of  the  troubled  days  so  recently  over,  pro- 
viding a  healing  power.  We  all  know  the  potency  of  music  in 
healing,  arousing  and  inspiring;  the  power  of  color  to  help  the 
mentally  ill;  of  pictures  to  bring  mental  relaxation,  comfort 
and  inspiration.  We  are  convinced  in  school  education,  as  in 
the  education  of  the  armed  forces,  that  audio- visual  aids  in- 
duce greater  interest,  and  happier,  more  effective  learning 
and  longer  remembering  in  less  time. 

Universal  adoption  of  this  effective  and  happy  way  of  teach- 
ing and  learning,  already  used  before  and  during  the  war  in 
many  of  our  educational  institutions  and  widely  developed 
by  educational  specialists  in  many  branches  of  the  armed 
forces,  will  make  our  schools  dynamic  centers  of  community 
life,  will  orient  our  boys  and  girls  for  world  citizenship.  If 
these  learning  and  training  tools  have  been  so  potent  in  bring- 
ing victory  to  the  world,  they  will  be  equally  effective  in  ban- 
16 


THERAPEUTIC 
VALUE 


ishing  the  ignorance,  misunderstanding,  greed,  and  hate 
which  hinder  a  universal  peace.  Boards  of  education,  associa- 
tions of  parent  teachers,  mothers'  clubs,  museums,  libraries, 
religious,  governmental  and  commercial  organizations  vs^ill 
recognize  this,  and  be  generous  in  their  assistance  with  funds, 
gifts  and  loans  for  the  schools. 


17 


III.  I  ypical  Classroom  Aids 


IT  IS  UNFORTUNATE  that  to  many  the  term  "visual  or 
audio-visual  aids"  today  still  means  principally  the  motion 
picture  and  the  lantern  slide.  For  a  true  picture  of  what  con- 
stitutes audio-visual  aids  it  would  be  well  to  take  a  census  of 
all  the  teaching  aids  and  materials  which  might  justifiably  be 
included  in  this  category. 

BLACKBOARD  AND  CHALK.  One  of  the  first  and  old- 
est of  the  visual  aids,  one  which  is  still  in  use  today,  is  a  piece 
of  chalk  and  a  blackboard.  This  combination  is  an  ever-effec- 
tive one,  and  no  schoolroom  should  be  without  it.  There  are 
times  when  the  presentation  of  any  subject  can  be  most  effec- 
tively achieved  by  means  of  a  "chalk  talk"  or  blackboard  dem- 
onstration. Both  teacher  and  student  should  use  this  medium, 
and  students  should  be  encouraged  to  go  to  the  blackboard 
and  illustrate  their  presentation  of  lesson  assignments  by 
means  of  writing  or  drawing  on  the  blackboard. 

BULLETIN  BOARDS.  From  blackboard  to  bulletin  board 
is  a  natural  transition.  This  board  may  be  a  single  piece  of 
homosote  or  heavy  cardboard,  framed  and  hung  in  a  class- 
room, or  it  may  be  a  large  board  or  series  of  boards  for  school 
corridor,  Hbrary,  study  rooms  or  school  museum.  Whatever 
its  size,  it  affords  an  opportunity  to  display  pictures,  charts, 
maps,  notices,  specimens,  newspaper  clippings  and  all  types 
of  materials  which  it  may  be  desirable  to  display  in  the  course 

19 


TYPICAL   CLASS 
ROOM    AIDS 


of  school  programs.  Material  displayed  on  a  bulletin  board 
naturally  attracts  attention.  Therefore,  great  care  should  be 
used  in  selecting  items  for  posting  on  this  board.  An  attractive 
arrangement  of  the  items  thus  posted  is  also  a  factor  in  catch- 
ing the  eye  and  holding  the  interest  of  the  observer. 

BOOK  ILLUSTRATIONS.  Illustrated  textbooks  and 
books  of  any  nature  included  in  the  learning  experience  of 
the  child  should  then  be  examined.  If  a  school  program  is  to 
be  effective,  it  is  highly  important  that  illustrations,  particu- 
larly those  in  the  textbooks  used,  be  of  a  high  standard.  Many 
an  otherw^ise  good  text  may  be  totally  inadequate  to  meet  stu- 
dents* needs  because  of  poor  or  badly  chosen  illustrations. 
Those  entrusted  with  the  adoption  of  texts  should  keep  this 
point  in  mind  when  selecting  textbooks.  The  school  librarian 
should  be  consulted  in  this  matter,  for  her  training  and  experi- 
ence in  the  actual  utilization  of  books  gives  her  an  insight  into 
what  appeals  and  what  has  meaning  to  children.  Teachers, 
supervisors,  .principals  and  parents  should  all  insist  that  the 
illustrations  in  books  of  every  type  be  selected  with  as  great 
care  as  the  textual  matter.  It  is  through  illustrations  that  the 
reader *s  attention  is  focused  upon  certain  facts.  Therefore,  the 
pictures  which  illustrate  and  elaborate  textual  content  should 
present  a  true  and  meaningful  concept.  Better  illustrations 
mean  better  visual  education. 

FLAT  PICTURES.  No  matter  how  well  illustrated  the  text- 
book in  use  may  be,  every  teacher  finds  it  helpful  to  have 
20 


FLAT 
PICTURES 


additional  pictorial  material  on  hand  to  enrich  a  lesson.  Beau- 
tiful color  reproductions  of  works  of  art,  peoples  and  costumes 
of  other  lands,  famous  places  in  other  parts  of  the  world,  all 
help  to  make  the  world  around  him  live  for  the  student.  Good 
reproductions  in  black  and  white  are  also  extra  aids  to  the 
enrichment  and  vitalization  of  lessons. 

The  question  as  to  whether  black  and  white  pictures  or  col- 
ored pictures  are  to  be  preferred,  is  practically  impossible  to 
answer  positively  and  finally.  In  general,  it  might  be  said  that 
colored  pictures  present  objects  and  things  as  they  are  and, 
therefore,  give  a  truer  likeness.  This  is  true  if  the  color  process 
by  which  the  picture  is  made  is  satisfactory,  and  the  color 
tones  are  faithful  to  the  original.  If  the  colors  are  not  true  to 
life,  it  might  be  better  to  have  good  black  and  white  reproduc- 
tions. In  scientific  and  technical  illustrations  and  diagrams  it  is 
often  better  to  have  black  and  white  pictures,  for  details  and 
lines  are  more  distinctly  and  clearly  shown. 

A  good  collection  of  flat  pictures  should  be  available  to 
every  teacher.  It  is  a  good  practice  to  have  a  general  reference 
collection  for  the  school,  one  on  which  each  teacher  may  draw, 
and  also  for  each  teacher  to  have  a  special  collection  of  her 
own,  particularly  pertinent  to  her  own  subject  or  class  needs. 
The  school  collection  may  contain  pictures  of  both  general 
and  specific  nature,  collections  of  reproductions  of  master- 
pieces, and  special  posters  and  prints.  The  class  collection  may 
be  made  up  of  pictures  from  magazines  and  newspapers,  art 
work  of  students,  photographs,  posters,  postal  cards,  advertis- 

21 


TYPICAL   CLASS- 
ROOM   AIDS 


ing  brochures,  etc.  These  pictures  should  all  be  mounted,  or 
kept  in  cellophane  or  manila  envelopes  for  protection.  They 
should  also  be  filed  so  that  they  are  accessible  when  needed. 

CARTOONS  AND  COMICS.  The  cartoon  is  a  unique 
pictorial  medium  which  has  long  had  a  visual  appeal  and 
which  has  assumed  even  greater  importance  in  the  last  few 
years.  If  a  cartoon  is  well-drawn,  the  work  of  a  clever  artist 
who  can  graphically  tell  his  story  in  picture  form,  it  is  a  visual 

Students  find  pleasure  and  profit  in  preparing  their  own  cartoons 
to  enliven  subjects  being  studied. 


22 


CARTOONS    AND 
COMICS 


aid  which  is  unique,  easily  understandable  and  appealing.  The 
cartoon  has  had  a  very  potent  effect  in  politics,  and  students 
of  economics  and  history  realize  the  power  which  it  can  wield. 
There  is  a  definite  place  for  the  cartoon  in  the  list  of  effective 
visual  aids  for  classroom  use. 

When  the  cartoon  is  reduced  to  the  level  of  the  slightly 
ludicrous  or  is  poorly  drawn,  it  loses  its  effectiveness.  Many 
so-called  "comic  strips''  and  books  of  comics  have  become 
exceedingly  popular  with  boys  and  girls.  The  appeal  of  this 
type  of  material  lies,  of  course,  in  the  universal  attraction 
which  pictures  hold  for  young  and  old  alike.  Unfortunately, 
many  of  these  comics  are  neither  well-drawn  nor  is  the  subject 
matter  well-chosen.  Those  who  are  responsible  for  them  have 
had  commercial  returns  in  mind  rather  than  educational  value. 
There  is  no  valid  reason  why  this  type  of  pictorial  presentation 
could  not  be  utilized  for  teaching  purposes  if  more  care  were 
given  to  the  production  of  worthwhile  picture  stories. 

It  may  be  that  if  less  emphasis  were  placed  on  the  designa- 
tion "comics,"  and  more  on  the  connotation  "cartoon,"  this 
pictorial  medium  would  better  serve  educational  purposes. 
The  dictionary  definition  of  cartoon,  "a  picture  especially  in- 
tended to  affect  public  opinion  as  to  some  matter  or  person," 
should  be  one  criterion  to  keep  in  mind  when  selecting  mate- 
rial of  this  type.  A  teacher  does  not  deliberately  select  poorly 
drawn  or  inferior  color  prints  for  use  in  the  art  class.  So  with 
cartoons,  careful  selection  should  be  the  determining  factor 
when  including  them  with  other  visual  aids.  If  well-drawn 

23 


TYPICAL   CLASS- 
ROOM   AIDS 


and  thoughtfully  prepared,  they  may  be  a  vital,  pictorial  me- 
dium for  the  presentation  of  many  different  subjects. 

MAPS,  GLOBES,  CHARTS  AND  GRAPHS.  Today,  the 
world  is  "map  conscious"  to  a  degree  never  before  known  to 
teacher  and  student.  It  is  vitally  important  that  every  teacher 
have  available  a  good  collection  of  aids  to  help  bring  this 
world  of  ours  clearly  within  the  focus  of  understanding  of  her 
pupils.  In  order  to  accomplish  this,  she  should  have  several 
types  of  maps  in  her  collection.  No  one  map  or  type  of  map  is 
adequate  to  do  the  complete  work  of  teaching  all  the  geo- 
graphic concepts  necessary  to  an  understanding  of  our  mod- 
ern world.  The  school  collection  should  contain  good  political 
maps,  physical  maps,  world  maps,  special  area  maps,  Mer- 
cator  projection  maps,  polar-centered  projection  maps,  old 
maps  and  pictorial  and  cartoon  maps.  As  special  needs  or 
problems  arise,  it  should  be  possible  for  teacher  and  student 
to  bring  to  the  classroom  the  particular  type  of  map  which  is 
designed  to  assist  in  clarifying  this  situation.  Pictorial  and 
cartoon  maps  will  frequently  be  found  helpful  in  humanizing 
geographic  concepts. 

The  same  care  and  judgment  should  be  used  in  selecting 
maps  as  are  used  in  selecting  flat  pictures.  A  map  is  a  picture 
of  the  world  or  some  portion  of  the  world.  The  map  pictures 
selected  for  any  lesson  should  be  those  best  adapted  to  meet 
the  need  of  the  student  at  the  moment  at  which  they  are  used. 
Many  teachers  prefer  using  a  variety  of  maps  ( political  map, 
24 


MAPS,  GLOBES 
AND  GRAPHS 

ancient  map,  modern  map,  etc. )  so  that  a  complete  story  may 
be  told.  This  is  very  good  when  the  question  under  consider- 
ation involves  exploration  and  changing  world  frontiers. 

The  picture  conveyed  by  a  map  will  always  be  more  com- 
plete if  a  globe  is  used  in  conjunction  with  the  map.  Globes 
are  needed  to  keep  before  the  student  the  picture  of  the  world 
as  it  is;  globes  bring  the  world  itself  into  the  classroom  for 
interpretation  and  consideration.  As  with  maps,  there  are  dif- 

Globes  and  maps,  used  in  conjunction  with  each  other,  give  stu- 
dents a  better  understanding  of  geography. 


25 


TYPICAL   CLASS- 
ROOM   AIDS 

ferent  types  of  globes:  political,  physical,  desk  model,  floor 
model,  etc.  It  is  advisable  to  have  several  diflPerent  types  of 
globes  in  the  school  collection. 

Charts  and  graphs  are  aids  which  belong  in  the  classifica- 
tion with  maps  and  globes.  Charts,  particularly  those  showing 
time  lines  and  historical  sequences,  help  to  visualize  historical 
development.  Diagrammatic  charts,  such  as  those  illustrating 
the  structure  of  governments  or  community  organization,  and 
picture  graphs  all  aid  in  bringing  before  students'  eyes  a  pic- 
ture of  the  world  and  the  things  upon  it. 

DIORAMAS.  There  is  available  today  a  visual  aid  which 
originated  in  the  museums  of  the  United  States  and  which  is 
only  just  beginning  to  be  used  effectively  in  the  classrooms. 
It  is  the  diorama.  The  term  "diorama**  is  derived  from  the 
Greek  and  means  "to  see  through."  The  diorama  itself  may  be 
defined  as:  "The  miniature,  three-dimensional  group  consist- 
ing of  small  modeled  and  colored  figures  and  specimens,  with 
accessories,  in  an  appropriate  setting,  and  in  most  instances 
artificially  lighted.  The  scale  and  size  of  the  group  is  variable; 
there  is  no  standard  shape;  there  is  no  limitation  as  to  subject 
matter,  which  may  be  realistic  or  imaginative  according  to 
what  the  creator  of  the  group  wishes  to  portray."  * 

Forerunners  of  the  diorama  are  to  be  found  in  the  religious 
crib,  displayed  at  Christmas  time,  in  small  carved  stage  sets 

*  Defined  by  Cypher,  LF.,  "The  Development  of  the  Diorama  in  the  Museums 
of  the  United  States."  New  York:  New  York  University,  1942,  Ph.D.  Thesis. 

26 


MODELS,    OBJECTS 
SPECIMENS 

and  models,  in  panoramas,  and  in  the  natural  habitat  groups 
found  in  museums.  The  diorama,  or  small  group,  is  an  inexpen- 
sive, practical  way  of  bringing  the  world  of  reality  and  of  im- 
agination into  the  classroom. 

As  the  average  diorama  for  classroom  use  is  usually  about 
12  inches  high  by  24  inches  long  by  12  inches  deep,  it  will 
easily  fit  on  a  teacher *s  desk  or  on  a  window-sill,  a  table  or  a 
shelf  in  the  average  classroom.  Small-scale  dimensions  have 
not  proved  a  barrier  to  its  effectiveness.  And  the  three-dimen- 
sional qualities  of  the  diorama  enable  it  to  give  an  illusion  of 
reality  which  makes  it  an  excellent  medium  whereby  to  visu- 
alize and  vitalize  any  subject.  Cardboard  cut-outs,  mechanis- 
tic groups  with  moving  trains  and  tractors,  and  Punch  and 
Judy  theaters  are  not  dioramas.  A  diorama  may  be  made  by 
pupils,  by  teachers,  or  by  both  working  together.  The  illusion 
of  reality  makes  the  diorama  an  excellent  aid  in  teaching  his- 
torical and  geographical  subjects,  for  its  three-dimensional 
qualities  and  modeled  figures  give  depth  and  body  to  any 
scene  presented. 

MODELS,  OBJECTS,  SPECIMENS.  It  may  often  be 
found  helpful  to  have  actual  specimens  or  scale-models  to  il- 
lustrate certain  lessons.  When  using  materials  of  this  nature, 
great  care  should  be  taken  to  explain  to  students  whether  or 
not  they  are  seeing  and  handling  a  true-size  specimen  or  a 
model  made  to  scale.  In  the  vocational  and  industrial  and 
mechanical  arts  classes,  the  making  of  the  models  often  con- 

27 


TYPICAL   CLASS- 
ROOM   AIDS 


stitutes  the  lesson  itself.  In  other  subject  areas  the  skills  uti- 
lized in  making  the  models  may  be  incidental  to  a  knowledge 
of  how  the  object  moves  and  works  and  functions.  Specimens 
are  an  important  aid  in  science  classes  and  nature  study 
classes.  Actual  specimens  of  birds,  animals,  reptiles,  flowers 
or  rocks  are  important  in  teaching  how  to  recognize  these 
objects.  Specimens  of  Indian  beadwork,  Venetian  glass,  Afri- 
can ivory  carvings  are  priceless,  not  because  of  their  intrinsic 
monetary  value,  but  because  the  handling  and  seeing  of  them 
gives  the  student  an  opportunity  to  contact  the  work  and  arti- 
facts of  another  people.  Firsthand  contact  with  the  crafts  of 
another  people  does  much  to  level  barriers. 

OPAQUE  MATERIALS.  This  type  of  material  and  the 
opaque  projector  are  of  great  advantage  in  schools  where  it 
is  diflBcult  to  procure  other  audio-visual  aids.  Pictures  from 
magazines  and  books,  color-prints,  original  drawings  in  black 
and  white  or  in  color,  and  postcards  may  be  used.  Even  the 
most  distant  rural  communities  would  have  some  of  these 
materials  available. 

Pictures  and  objects  may  be  presented  separately  or  in  re- 
lated sequence.  Pictures  shown  by  the  latter  method  are  more 
effective  if  they  are  mounted  on  a  strip  of  paper  of  the  width 
required  for  use  in  the  projector,  and  long  enough  to  take  care 
of  the  picture  sequence.  This  strip  of  pictures  may  be  folded, 
placed  on  the  picture-plate  of  the  projector,  and  each  picture 
on  the  strip  released  as  desired. 
28 


LANTERN 
SLIDES 


The  disadvantage  of  the  opaque  projector  is  that  it  is  heavy 
to  carry  and  more  difficult  to  "frame"  the  picture  for  projec- 
tion. 

LANTERN  SLIDES.  Lantern  shdes  were  one  of  the  first 
teaching  aids  to  be  called  "visual  aids."  Today  a  teacher  should 
specify  whether  she  is  using  the  "standard"  lantern  slide, 
which  in  America  is  3/4  inches  high  by  4  inches  long,  or  the 
small  2x2  inch  slide.  This  latter  slide,  if  it  is  a  photograph  in 
natural  color,  is  usually  called  Kodachrome  (really  a  trade 

The  versatile  opaque  projector  makes  possible  the  use  of  many 
varying  visual  materials. 


29 


TYPICAL   CLASS- 
ROOM   AIDS 


name),  and  refers  to  the  picture  in  color  on  35  mm.  film  which 
has  been  processed  and  mounted  in  a  2x2  inch  mount  or 
frame.  This  same  2x2  inch  size  lantern  slide,  however,  may 
consist  of  black  and  white  film  so  that,  properly,  we  should 
not  call  this  size  slide  Kodachrome. 

The  standard  3/4  x  4  inch  lantern  slide  may  be  drawn  in  ink 
or  crayon  on  clear  glass,  etched  glass,  or  cellophane,  or  luma- 
rith,  covered  with  a  cover  glass  and  bound;  or  it  may  be  made 
by  a  photographic  process  and  the  resulting  photographic 
slide  covered  with  a  cover  glass,  masked,  and  bound.  In  either 
case,  the  result  is  a  glass  lantern  slide  ( in  color  or  in  black  and 
white )  which  must  be  inserted  in  a  lantern  slide  projector  and 
projected  on  a  special  screen,  on  a  white  wall,  on  a  shade  or 
other  flat  surface  which  enables  one  to  see  the  picture. 

The  small  lantern  slide,  as  explained  before,  is  photographed 
either  in  color  or  in  black  and  white.  The  resulting  pictures 
are  mounted  singly  either  in  cardboard  mounts  or  put  be- 
tween glass  and  bound  as  in  the  case  of  the  standard  slide. 
This  latter  process  serves  to  protect  and  preserve  the  film.  This 
slide,  too,  must  be  inserted  in  a  projector  and  projected  on  a 
screen. 

Whether  the  lantern  slide  is  standard  or  small  size,  its  value 
lies  in  the  fact  that  ( 1 )  it  brings  pictorial  material  into  the 
classroom;  (2)  the  projection  on  a  screen  enlarges  the  picture 
so  that  it  may  be  examined  and  studied;  ( 3 )  the  projected  pic- 
ture remains  still  and  steady  so  that  details  may  be  noted  and 
commented  upon. 
30 


LANTERN 
SLIDES 

Lantern  slides  of  either  size  may  be  made  up  in  sets  and 
shown  in  some  particular  rotation  or  they  may  be  rearranged 
and  shown  in  different  order  as  the  need  dictates.  As  many  or 
as  few  slides  may  be  shown  at  a  time  as  a  teacher  desires  to 
use,  and  the  operator  of  the  projector  determines  the  speed  at 
which  they  are  shown  and  changed.  Each  size  lantern  slide 
requires  a  projector  constructed  particularly  for  that  size  slide. 
However,  where  schools  do  not  have  projectors  for  the  small 
size  shdes,  adapters  to  hold  these  slides  may  be  made  or  pur- 
Large  projectors,  ordinarily  used  for  showing  standard  3^4  x  4  inch 
slides  can  easily  be  adapted  for  showing  small  2x2  inch  slides. 


TYPICAL   CLASS- 
ROOM   AIDS 


chased,  and  used  in  standard  size  lantern  slide  projectors. 
As  is  true  with  many  types  of  visual  aids,  the  value  of  lan- 
tern slides  may  lie  in  the  research  and  study  involved  when 
pupils  themselves  make  the  slides.  Slides  purchased  or  bor- 
rowed from  commercial  sources  and  servicing  agencies  will, 
of  course,  be  more  "finished"  products  and  their  value  lies  in 
the  wide  variety  of  material  from  all  over  the  world  that  they 
bring  to  the  classroom. 

FILMSTRIPS  OR  FILMSLIDES.  A  modern  adapta- 
tion of  the  lantern  slide  is  found  in  the  visual  aid  variously 
called  filmslide,  filmstrip  and  stillfilm.  Stillfilm  was  the  origi- 
nal trade  name  under  which  it  was  first  manufactured  and 
applied  to  a  roll  of  film  attached  to  a  spool  and  pulled  by  hand 
through  an  adapter  attached  to  a  lantern  slide  projector.  To- 
day spool  and  adapter  are  no  longer  used.  Instead,  especially 
designed  projectors  are  made  to  project  filmstrip.  Filmstrip  is 
the  preferred  name  and  the  one  most  often  used,  although 
filmslide  is  not  altogether  incorrect. 

Filmstrip  is  made  by  photographing  scenes  or  objects  on 
narrow  gauge,  35  mm.  film,  which  contains  sprocket  holes 
along  each  side  of  the  film.  This  film  is  processed  and  the  fin- 
ished roll  of  film  projected  on  a  screen  by  means  of  the  special 
projector.  (Projectors  are  available  which  may  be  used  for 
both  filmstrip  and  the  small  size  lantern  slide. )  Filmstrip  may 
be  in  black  and  white  or  in  color.  Titles  may  accompany  each 
picture,  or,  as  is  often  the  case,  a  manual  accompanies  each 
32 


FILMSTRIPS    OR 
FILMSLIDES 


roll  of  filmstrip  and  comments  and  explanations  may  be  made 
by  teachers  or  pupils.  The  operator  of  the  projector  controls 
the  speed  at  which  the  filmstrip  is  turned  and  may  turn  the 
film  forwards  or  backwards  at  will.  One  advantage  of  filmstrip 
is  its  lightness  and  portability,  since  twenty-five  to  one  hun- 
dred pictures  may  be  placed  on  a  single  strip  of  film  which  can 
then  be  rolled  and  stored  in  a  small  light  metal  container.  If 

The  filmstrip  and  its  projector  have  the  advantage  of  lightness  and 
portabihty. 


33 


TYPICAL   CLASS- 
ROOM   AIDS 

desired,  the  strip  may  be  cut  into  single  pictures  and  each  pic- 
ture mounted  in  a  2x2  inch  frame.  Technically  speaking, 
these  are  the  "film  slides"  and  the  entire  roll  of  film  the  film- 
strip.  Teachers  and  students  may  make  their  own  films  trip, 
thereby  gaining  many  valuable  lessons  in  the  production  of 
visual  aids.  A  disadvantage  of  filmstrip  is  that  the  sequence 
of  arrangement  is  fixed  so  long  as  the  strip  is  kept  intact,  and 
the  order  in  which  scenes  are  shown  cannot  be  changed  to  suit 
different  presentations. 

STEREOGRAPHS  AND  STEREOSCOPES,  ANA- 
GLYPHS AND  VECTOGRAPHS.  A  stereograph  is 
a  double  picture  usually  mounted  on  cardboard  and  inserted 
in  a  special  viewer  or  instrument  known  as  a  stereoscope.  The 
factor  that  makes  this  visual  aid  of  value  is  that  the  flat  pic- 
tures thus  viewed  take  on  three-dimensional  qualities  which 
make  objects  in  the  foreground  stand  out  as  though  real 
against  the  background.  This  method  of  viewing  scenes  was 
popular  in  our  grandmother's  day  and  is  still  of  value  today. 
The  photographs  viewed  have  been  taken  by  a  camera  with 
double  lenses  separated  by  a  distance  equal  to  that  of  the  nor- 
mal distance  between  a  man's  eyes.  One  exposure  is  for  the 
right  eye  and  the  other  for  the  left.  The  resulting  picture  is 
viewed  in  a  double  optical  unit  in  which  the  lenses  are  simi- 
larly spaced.  When  this  viewer  is  properly  focused  by  the  one 
using  it,  the  picture  viewed  takes  on  an  illusion  of  depth  and 
reality. 
34 


STEREOGRAPHS 
VECTOGRAPHS 


The  stereograph  is  for  individual  use.  It  is  an  excellent  vis- 
ual aid  where  it  is  desirable  to  have  individual  pupil  research 
and  study.  It  is,  because  of  its  nature,  not  entirely  satisfactory 
for  group  study,  although  each  member  of  a  group  may,  of 
course,  eventually  view  the  same  pictures. 

An  adaptation  of  the  stereograph,  known  as  the  orthovis  or 
anaglyph,  may  ^Iso  be  used  to  achieve  an  illusion  of  reality.  In 
this  device  a  stereo  graphic  picture  is  printed  in  two  colors 
(usually  red  and  blue ) ,  one  superimposed  upon  the  other  and 
examined  through  a  special  viewer  containing  one  red  lens 

For  individual  pupil  study,  stereoscopes  are  excellent  visual  aids. 


35 


TYPICAL   CLASS 
ROOM    AIDS 


and  one  blue.  The  blending  of  the  colors  as  seen  through  the 
viewer  gives  depth  and  roundness  to  the  picture,  making  it 
seem  quite  real  and  lifelike. 

Still  another  adaptation  of  the  stereograph  is  the  vecto- 
graph.  Here  the  print  or  picture  may  be  in  color  or  in  black 
and  white,  but  the  two  photographs  taken  are  printed  on  op- 
posite sides  of  a  polarizing  film.  The  resultiAg  print  is  then 
projected  on  a  screen  for  individuals  and  groups  to  view.  Each 
member  of  the  group,  however,  must  use  a  special  polaroid 
viewer  or  the  print  will  not  appear  to  have  three-dimensional 
qualities.  This  type  of  visual  material  was  employed  to  a  large 
degree  by  both  the  Army  and  the  Navy  during  World  War  II 
and  is  being  adapted  for  motion  picture  use.  At* present  it  must 
be  made  by  professionals  and  has  not  been  used  to  any  great 
extent  by  schools. 

MOTION  PICTURES,  It  is  no  longer  necessary  to  define 
a  motion  picture,  for  motion  pictures  are  available  in  every 
community.  For  the  classroom  teacher  the  decision  to  make 
with  regard  to  their  use  is  whether  or  not  to  use  sound  or  silent 
motion  pictures,  black  and  white  or  color,  and  35  mm.  or 
16  mm.  film. 

The  last  problem  is  most  easily  answered.  35  mm.  must  be 
projected  from  a  fireproof  booth  by  a  licensed  operator.  Few 
schools  have  either  the  equipment  or  the  necessary  operator 
so  that  this  type  of  film  is  used  mostly  in  large  auditoriums  or 
for  special  occasions. 
36 


MOTION 
PICTURES 


Most  classroom  motion  pictures  today  are  made  in  the 
16  mm.  width,  noninflammable,  acetate  base  film.  Some  of  the 
smaller  8  mm.  width  film  is  to  be  found,  but  this  is  generally  in 
use  in  homes.  The  16  mm.  film  has  come  to  be  almost  standard 
school  equipment.  The  usual  reel  contains  four  hundred  feet 
of  film  and  takes  about  12  minutes  to  project. 


A  student  operating  a  sound  motion  picture  projector  in  a  Portland, 

Oregon,  public  school. 


37 


TYPICAL   CLASS- 
ROOM   AIDS 


The  next  two  questions  depend  upon  the  school  equipment, 
the  need  of  the  moment,  and  the  technique  best  suited  to 
meeting  the  need.  If  a  school  has  only  a  silent  projector,  sound 
film  cannot  be  used.  If  the  projector  is  a  sound  projector,  the 
sound  track  on  a  film  may  or  may  not  be  utilized.  There  are 
times  when  it  is  best  for  all  purposes  to  run  a  film  without  the 
sound  track  so  that  students  may  not  be  influenced  in  any 
way,  or  so  that  the  teacher  may  make  her  own  comments. 

The  question  of  whether  to  use  black  and  white  or  color  film 
is  usually  answered  for  the  teacher  by  the  film  producers. 
Many  films  are  obtainable  only  in  black  and  white.  Where 
color  prints  are  available,  the  teacher  herself  should  judge 
which  type  of  film  best  meets  the  needs  of  her  class.  Good 
black  and  white  is  preferable  to  poor  colors.  Many  subjects, 
such  as  operation  of  machines  and  similar  topics,  are  clearest 
when  shown  in  black  and  white.  Color  is  helpful  when  iden- 
tifying geographic  features,  peoples,  costumes  and  natural 
objects.  Color  processing  has  improved,  and  films  taken  in  true 
color  seem  generally  to  take  on  a  greater  degree  of  reality  than 
those  taken  in  black  and  white. 

The  motion  picture,  because  of  the  factor  of  motion,  shows 
peoples  and  objects  in  action.  This  very  factor,  however,  cou- 
pled with  the  speed  at  which  a  film  is  projected  makes  it  im- 
possible to  hold  any  one  scene  for  lengthy  examination,  but 
the  movement  and  action  in  the  film  have  the  advantage  of 
creating  an  illusion  of  reality  and  make  subjects  real  to 
students. 
38 


MOTION 
PICTURES 

Teachers  should  never  use  motion  pictures  for  teaching  pur- 
poses without  first  previewing  them.  Where  sound  effects  are 
essential  to  the  understanding  of  the  subject  matter  shown, 
sound  films  should  always  be  used.  The  motion  picture  should 
not  be  used  to  "fill  in"  vacant  periods,  for  recreation  only 
(except  in  cases  where  the  program  is  frankly  an  entertain- 
ment), or  as  a  substitute  for  careful,  well-planned  teaching. 
The  motion  picture  is  not  a  rapid,  sure-fire  way  of  teaching 
everything  and  should  not  be  considered  as  such. 

Motion  pictures  are  available  today  for  use  in  practically 
every  subject  area.  Excellent  films  are  available  from  commer- 
cial and  industrial  sources,  from  museums,  from  community 
organizations,  clubs,  historical  societies,  state  and  federal 
agencies  and  many  other  sources.  They  should  be  brought  into 
the  classroom  and  used  wherever  and  whenever  possible. 

It  is  not  difficult  to  learn  to  run  a  motion  picture  projector. 
Every  teacher  worthy  of  the  name  should  learn  to  use  this 
equipment  and  make  it  part  of  her  methodology  and  tech- 
niques. Schools  should  provide  the  best  equipment  they  can 
aflFord  and  principals  should  see  to  it  that  teachers  have  the 
opportunity  to  use  the  equipment  to  best  advantage  for  all 
concerned. 

It  has  often  been  found  advantageous  to  form  "Visual  In- 
struction Squads"  and  train  students  in  the  use  of  visual  equip- 
ment. This  practice  has  helped  meet  the  need  for  projectionists 
when  only  one  teacher  knows  how  to  run  the  machines,  and 
has  also  instilled  a  respect  for  the  equipment  in  the  students 

39 


TYPICAL   CLASS 
ROOM    AIDS 


themselves.  Such  squads,  however,  should  always  be  under 
teacher  guidance  and  supervision  for  best  results.  It  is  also  a 
practice  which  works  best  with  older  students.  Younger  stu- 
dents are  more  likely  to  be  careless  with  equipment  and  to 
become  upset  when  mechanical  difficulties  arise. 

RADIO,  RECORDINGS,  AND  SOUND  SYSTEMS. 
Many  schools  and  classrooms  today  have  facilities  for  the  uti- 
lization of  radio,  and  phonographic  recordings  in  classrooms 
and  auditoriums.  The  phonograph  and  records  are  fairly  well 
known  to  most  people.  Records  used  in  schools  may  be  orches- 
tral selections,  instrumental  pieces,  songs,  dances  or  speeches. 

In  addition  to  the  kinds  of  records  just  listed,  there  is  the 
transcription,  or  recording  made  of  a  radio  program,  a  speech 
or  other  public  event.  These  transcriptions  make  it  possible 
to  bring  into  the  classroom  programs  and  speeches  dealing 
with  current  events  and  the  spoken  word,  and  help  to  vitalize 
facts  that  might  otherwise  be  little  more  than  the  printed 
word  on  a  page  of  a  textbook.  Schools  should  be  equipped 
with  phonographs  and  play-back  machines  so  that  these  re- 
cordings may  be  used  in  conjunction  with  other  types  of 
materials. 

Radio  is  a  two-way  audio-visual  aid— it  works  from  without 
and  from  within  the  school.  Programs  originating  in  radio 
studios,  under  technical  supervision  and  professionally  di- 
rected, may  be  brought  into  the  classroom  through  the  me- 
dium of  radio  sets  and  loudspeakers  installed  in  the  classroom. 
40 


RADIO,    RECORDINGS 
SOUND    SYSTEMS 

By  this  means,  programs  prepared  directly  for  school  use, 
famous  concerts,  public  events,  may  all  be  made  a  part  of  the 
learning  experience  of  the  students. 

Radio  from  "within"  the  school  may  take  the  form  of  pro- 
grams prepared  and  carried  out  by  the  students  themselves. 
If  public  address  equipment  and  microphones  are  installed  in 

The  phonograph  is  a  valuable  audio  aid  in  nursery  school  as  well 
as  with  older  groups. 


41 


TYPICAL   CLASS- 
ROOM   AIDS 

a  school,  Students  can  then  put  on  their  own  programs.  The 
experience  gained  from  writing  scripts,  timing  and  planning 
programs,  and  carrying  out  mechanical  details  are  all  of  great 
value  for  students  today.  Frequently  this  type  of  experience 
lays  the  groundwork  for  future  vocational  training. 

STORY-TELLING,  ILLUSTRATED  TALKS,  DEM- 
ONSTRATIONS. The  human  voice  is  the  first  "audio-aid" 
that  a  teacher  has  to  draw  upon.  Well-told  stories,  whether  in 
nursery  school  or  high  school  classrooms,  make  vivid  and  last- 
ing impressions.  Many  times  some  legend  or  little-known  ac- 
count of  details  not  covered  in  a  textbook  will  change  pupil 
attitudes  and  reactions  towards  a  subject.  Teachers  should 
include  the  telling  of  stories  by  themselves  and  by  pupils  in 
their  planning  of  audio-visual  aid  programs. 

The  story  illustrated  by  carefully  selected  lantern  slides, 
pictures,  films,  dioramas  or  other  visual  aids,  which  supple- 
ment the  details  supplied  by  vocal  descriptions,  can  be  made 
an  effective  aid  in  a  teaching  program.  This  type  of  presenta- 
tion is  particularly  important  in  the  area  of  social  studies,  art 
and  English,  but  it  could  also  be  used  to  advantage  for  mathe- 
matics, science  and  vocational  studies. 

Science  teachers  have  for  years  been  familiar  with  demon- 
strations whereby  certain  principles  in  chemistry,  biology,  or 
physics  have  been  shown.  Scientific  equipment,  such  as  micro- 
scopes and  other  apparatus  have  been  used  in  these  demon- 
strations. This  equipment  should  be  supplemented  today  with 
42 


TABLEAUX,   DRAMATICS 
SONGS,    DANCES 

the  inclusion  of  the  other  aids  already  mentioned.  Demonstra- 
tions of  techniques  should  not  be  confined  to  the  science 
classes,  but  should  be  utilized  in  all  subject  areas. 

TABLEAUX,  DRAMATICS,  SONGS,  DANCES.  Tab- 
leaux, plays,  in  fact,  all  dramatic  presentations  are  audio- 
visual aids.  This  is  particularly  true  when  the  dramatic  pres- 
entation is  built  around  some  historical  event  or  social  episode. 
In  the  preparation  and  presentation  of  such  programs  all  the 
various  types  of  visual  aids  may  be  called  upon;  slides  may  be 

All  dramatic  presentations  are  audio-visual  aids  whether  they  be 
flower  pageants  by  elementary  pupils,  or  elaborate  performances. 


43 


TYPICAL   CLASS 
ROOM    AIDS 


shown  for  the  makers  of  the  stage  scenery  and  costumes  to 
study;  records  played  to  famiharize  the  orchestra  with  the 
music;  radio  programs  hstened  to  as  models  of  good  speech 
and  diction. 

The  final  presentation  itself  is,  of  course,  an  audio  and  a 
visual  program  both  for  those  giving  it  and  for  those  watching. 
Although  the  entertainment  factor  may  seem  uppermost  in 
such  presentations,  many  lessons  are  learned  in  the  prepara- 
tory period  that  will  be  of  value  in  more  formal  class  periods. 

Songs  and  dances  are  an  almost  universal  language  for  man- 
kind. An  understanding  of  the  songs  and  dances  of  another 
people  leads  to  an  understanding  of  the  people  themselves. 
Songs  and  dances  should  be  included  both  in  single  class  proj- 
ects and  in  group  and  school  projects. 

^'TREASURE  TRIPS'-FIELD  TRIPS.  The  audio-visual 
aids  described  thus  far  have  all  been  those  used  within  the 
classroom  or  school  building,  but  there  often  comes  a  time 
when  effective  teaching  demands  contact  with  materials  out- 
side the  school.  "Treasure  trips"  or  field  trips  supply  this  need, 
but  they  are  of  real  value  only  when  carefully  planned  and 
correlated  with  classroom  work. 

The  treasure  trip  may  be  a  visit  to^  museum  or  community 
center  where  objects  of  art,  natural  history,  or  science  may  be 
seen  under  the  guidance  of  trained  leaders  and  in  accordance 
with  pre-planned  programs.  It  is  a  field  trip,  but  one  in  which 
the  teacher  knows  that  every  step  of  the  way  has  been  planned 
44 


TREASURE 
TRIPS 


This  Baluchitherium  just  won't  fit  into  a  classroom.  Treasure  trips 
to  museums  are  invaluable  when  correlated  properly  with  school 
work. 

45 


TYPICAL   CLASS 
ROOM    AIDS 


to  fit  into  a  definite  over-all  pattern  designed  to  enrich  the 
students*  experiences. 

Field  trips  may  be  taken  to  parks,  zoos,  famous  buildings, 
docks,  factories,  libraries,  stores,  to  any  place  whose  resources 
will  help  vitalize  the  lesson  of  the  moment.  The  best  trips  are 
those  well-planned  in  advance;  those  for  which  preparatory 
and  follow-up  work  are  provided;  those  which  do  not  include 
so  great  a  variety  of  things  to  see  that  physical  fatigue  inter- 
feres with  appreciation  of  the  things  seen;  those  in  which  the 
student  is  encouraged  to  return  on  his  own  time  or  with  his 
parents  to  see  more.  The  field  trip  combines  the  hearing  and 
seeing  of  things,  and  a  teacher  should  try  to  include  at  least 
one,  and  sometimes  many,  such  experiences  in  her  programs. 

COLOR  AND  SOUND.  The  use  of  color  and  sound  has 
taken  on  increased  importance  today.  The  world  around  us 
has  color,  and  we  are  constantly  listening  to  sounds. 

In  selecting  audio-visual  aids  the  teacher  should  strive  to 
get  those  which  give  as  realistic  and  natural  pictures  of  sub- 
jects as  possible.  In  the  selection  of  sound  equipment,  those 
aids  should  be  used  which  give  as  good  tonal  qualities  as  pos- 
sible. It  is  better  to  use  non-colored  and  silent  materials  than 
to  use  those  which  give  false  impressions. 

Research  in  these  two  fields,  however,  has  made  great 
strides.  Motion  pictures,  slides,  filmstrips,  dioramas,  and 
most  of  the  other  aids  mentioned  in  this  chapter,  have  reached 
a  point  where  there  seems  but  little  more  that  can  be  done  to 
46 


RELATIVE 
ADVANTAGES 


improve  them.  The  changes  that  will  be  made  to  adapt  them 
to  meet  teaching  situations  more  eflFectively  will  be  in  the 
application  and  use  of  color  and  sound. 

RELATIVE  ADVANTAGES.  There  is  no  one  perfect 
audio-visual  aid.  The  sooner  we  find  this  out,  the  better. 
The  audio-visual  aid,  or  combination  of  aids,  which  can  pro- 
duce the  most  effective  result  in  a  given  teaching  situation 
should  be  considered  best— but  only  in  that  situation. 

When  an  illusion  of  reahty  is  desired,  a  diorama  will  usually 
achieve  this.  When  it  is  desirable  to  see  persons  and  things  in 
action,  living  and  moving,  the  motion  picture  is  usually  the 
best  aid  to  employ.  When  lengthy  and  detailed  examination 
is  desired,  the  best  results  will  probably  be  attained  by  the  use 
of  mounted  pictures,  lantern  slides,  and  filmstrips— or  actual 
specimens  themselves.  Diction  and  speech  are  helped  by  listen- 
ing to  recordings  of  famous  speakers  and  to  radio  programs. 

No  one  can  tell  a  teacher  exactly  what  to  use.  The  good 
teacher  knows  the  pupils  in  her  class,  their  weaknesses  and 
their  strength.  If  she  is  worthy  the  designation  of  teacher,  she 
will  have  as  many  types  of  supplementary  materials  at  hand 
as  possible,  and  then  use  them  singly,  or  in  combinations,  in 
the  ways  which  she  feels  will  help  her  make  the  subject  under 
consideration  come  alive  and  acquire  reality  and  solidity  for 
her  pupils.  Audio-visual  aids  are  particularly  effective  in  cer- 
tain types  of  programs.  Succeeding  chapters  will  indicate 
what  these  are  and  offer  suggestions  for  using  them. 

47 


THE  APPEAL  TO  THE  EAR  today  is  increasingly  exten- 
sive. Through  the  radio  which  may  be  found  in  most  homes 
and  many  schools,  we  have  all  developed  the  habit  of  listen- 
ing. No  other  medium  is  more  powerful  in  social  life  and  edu- 
cation in  making  children— and  adults— world-conscious.  No 
other  medium  can  make  it  possible  for  so  many  to  share  an 
experience  at  the  same  time.  No  other  medium  can  so  com- 
pletely remove  space  and  time  and  so  effectively  eliminate 
differences  between  city  and  rural  ways  of  living  in  various 
countries. 

RADIO.  Radio  programs  are  not  only  popular  in  appeal  but 
many  of  them  are  of  direct  or  indirect  educational  value. 
Through  the  imagination  of  the  listeners  which  creates  pic- 
tures in  keeping  with  the  audio  appeal,  there  is  also  strong 
appeal  to  feeling,  to  emotion.  The  play  or  dramatized  story  is 
vitalized  by  sound  effects,  the  characters  take  on  form  and  per- 
sonality as  the  listener  identifies  himself  with  the  action  of  the 
plot.  Many  radio  programs  have  definite  educational  objec- 
tives. Several  of  the  programs  of  the  large  nation-wide  radio 
networks  are  planned  to  integrate  with  various  areas  in  the 
curriculum,  to  increase  the  interest  of  boys  and  girls  and  to 
promote  leisure  reading. 

Some  educational  programs  are  more  effective  for  school 
use  in  one  part  of  the  country  than  another,  because  of  the 

49 


RADIO    AND 
TELEVISION 


time  element  which  allows  the  inclusion  of  these  programs 
during  school  hours.  Other  programs,  not  available  in  school 
hours,  also  serve  to  enrich  and  vitalize  literature,  humanize 
history  and  the  sciences,  encourage  the  desire  for  good  music. 
Short  stories,  novels,  plays,  even  Shakespearean  dramas,  are 
presented.  Various  "Theaters  of  the  Air"  in  which  well-known 
managers,  actors  and  authors  take  part,  not  only  enrich  litera- 
ture per  se,  but  promote,  by  example,  better  diction  and  voice 
and  a  richer  vocabulary.  Often  they  encourage  the  applica- 
tion of  the  interest  aroused  by  the  program  to  the  writing  of 
original  material.  Boys  and  girls  may  be  guided  in  their  crit- 
ical judgment  of  programs  which  are  truly  literary  and  equally, 
if  not  more,  interesting,  than  those  which  are  of  no  value 
in  the  enrichment  of  any  area  of  the  curriculum  or  in  char- 
acter development. 

Although  the  radio  must  entertain  as  well  as  educate,  the 
two  may  go  hand-in-hand.  Educators,  broadcasters,  sponsors 
should— and  no  doubt  will— cooperate  more  closely  and  more 
intelligently,  for  only  by  each  recognizing  and  understanding 
the  aims  and  problems  of  the  other,  can  better  and  more 
stimulating  educational  programs  be  prepared  which  will  be 
acceptable,  also,  from  the  point  of  view  of  entertainment. 
Then  the  radio,  through  station  programs,  their  transcriptions 
and  recordings,  will  become  an  increasingly  powerful  audio- 
aid  in  education.  What  radio  has  accomplished  for  politics, 
news,  and  commercial  advertising,  it  can  and  should  do  for 
education. 
50 


RADIO    AND 
TELEVISION 


Today,  more  than  ever  before,  radio  programs  bring  the 
world  to  the  home  and  the  classroom,  bridging  time  and 
space.  Radio  is  of  inestimable  value  as  a  medium  of  com- 
munication in  an  age  of  communication.  It  is  our  greatest 
means  of  communication,  since  distance  from  centers  of  learn- 
ing is  no  hindrance.  In  the  United  States  alone  there  are  four 
coast-to-coast  networks,  thirty-five  regional  networks,  nine 
hundred  and  thirty  local  stations,  and  sixty-five  thousand 
fifteen-minute  units  of  program  service  daily.  Under  a  new 
system  of  radio  engineering,  "frequency  modulation,"  there 
may  be  as  many  as  ten  networks.  But  why  are  there,  today,  so 
few  educational  institutional  stations?  Is  it  lack  of  funds,  lack 
of  interest,  lack  of  technique?  Why  are  there  not  more  stations 
like  WHA  College  of  the  Air,  the  University  of  Wisconsin's 
"broadcasting  outlet"  in  Madison,  which  brings  to  its  listeners 
courses  conducted  by  University  professors,  home  and  agri- 
cultural information  through  the  Home  Makers'  Hour  and 
Farm  Program?  Surely  this  station  has  been  an  aid  to  com- 
munity education. 

TELEVISION.  Radio  has,  of  course,  supplied  information 
through  the  medium  of  "hearing."  Television  will  bring  to  us 
the  "seeing"  or  visual  medium.  When  we  actually  show  a 
program  in  a  classroom  as  well  as  listen  to  it,  audio-visual  aids 
will  be  functioning  as  complete  units  for  the  enrichment  of 
classroom  teaching.  There  is  no  doubt  but  that  television  has 
great  possibilities  as  a  visual  aid.  It  also  has  limitations  which 

51 


RADIO    AND 
TELEVISION 


have  not  as  yet  been  overcome  in  a  suiSicient  degree  to  make 
it  possible  to  use  television  to  any  extent  in  the  classroom 
itself.  Scientists  and  engineers  are  making  progress,  however, 
and  it  is  to  be  expected  that  these  difficulties  will  soon  be 
eliminated. 

The  entertainment  potentialities  of  television  are  accepted 
facts  today.  The  educational  potentialities  have  not  yet  been 
fully  realized.  At  present  the  size  of  the  screen  on  which  the 
televised  image  or  picture  is  shown  is  too  small  for  classroom 
use.  The  average  class  is  too  large  to  be  seated  so  that  all  may 
see  the  picture.  Secondly,  television  sets  are  expensive  and  the 
value  to  be  derived  from  their  use  is  not  sufficient  to  warrant 
expenditure  of  school  funds  for  this  type  of  equipment.  Larger 
television  screens  are  being  manufactured  and  it  has  been 
predicted  that  in  about  five  years'  time  television  sets  will 
be  as  common  as  radio  sets  are  today. 

•  The  usual  procedure  now  is  for  classes  to  visit  a  television 
studio  if  this  medium  is  to  be  employed  as  a  teaching  aid. 
Most  of  the  larger  broadcasting  companies  are  planning  tele- 
vision programs  suitable  for  junior  and  senior  high  school 
classes,  but  the  classes  must  go  to  the  studio  to  see  or  partici- 
pate in  the  programs.  Classes  from  schools  in  the  cities  where 
these  studios  are  located  have  access  to  the  television  pro- 
grams. It  is  difficult,  however,  for  classes  in  rural  areas  to  make 
trips  to  the  studios.  The  programs  are  thus  not  available  to 
them. 


52 


Scene  from  a  high  school  student  forum  on  current  topics  televised 
over  WCBS-TV  in  collaboration  with  the  New  York  City  Board 
of  Education. 


AIR  AND  AIR  PRESSURE.  The  American  Museum  of 
Natural  History  has  pioneered  in  the  presentation  of  educa- 
tional programs  through  the  medium  of  television.  The  fol- 
lowing program  is  the  result  of  a  memorandum  prepared  by 
Mr.  Julius  P.  Postal,  Supervisor  of  Radio  and  Sound,  for 
Dr.  Charles  Russell,  Chairman  of  the  Department  of  Educa- 
tion, both  of  that  museum.  It  was  prepared  in  order  to  give 
an  idea  of  the  potentialities  and  limitations  of  television.  The 
film  "Air  and  Air  Pressure"  used  in  the  program  was  particu- 
larly well  adapted  to  illustrate  how  the  characteristics  of  tele- 
vision can  be  used  to  advantage.  A  plan  to  make  special  films 
for  television  use  giew  out  of  extensive  experience  in  the 
presentation  of  experimental  scientific  and  educational  tele- 

53 


RADIO    AND 
TELEVISION 


casts.  Some  of  these  were  entirely  "live/'  Others  combined 
"live"  appearances  by  actors  and  scientists  with  film  material. 

It  soon  became  apparent  that  live  science  telecasts  were 
not  only  severely  trying  to  the  scientists,  but  were  costly, 
time-consuming,  and  had  an  embarrassing  way  of  developing 
unpredicted  quirks.  For  instance,  snakes  would  become  nerv- 
ous or  extremely  active  under  the  hot  lights.  Or  life-like 
artificial  flowers  of  the  type  for  which  the  Museum  is  famous, 
would  soften  and  melt.  Then,  ultra  close-ups  involving  f oUow- 
focus,  which  require  extreme  care  under  the  most  favorable 
circumstances,  would  go  out  of  focus  at  precisely  the  wrong 
moment. 

The  technical  problems  are  not  insurmountable;  they  are 
well  on  the  way  to  solution.  But  it  is  unlikely  that  the  move- 
ments of  a  baby  raccoon  are  ever  going  to  be  as  predictable 
and  as  controllable  as  those  of  a  trained  actor  or  actress. 

The  simplest  of  laboratory  demonstrations,  which  presents 
no  problem  in  a  high  school  physics  laboratory,  can  put  a  tele- 
vision crew  into  a  state  of  fidgets  when  it  is  a  matter  of  split- 
second  timing. 

One  thing  that  will  probably  never  be  eliminated  is  the 
ever-present  need  in  television  for  rehearsal,  more  rehearsal, 
and  still  more  rehearsal.  To  a  school,  a  teacher,  or  a  scientist, 
the  time  factor  is  apt  to  be  a  real  deterrent.  Furthermore,  once 
a  thing  is  done  before  a  television  camera,  and  has  gone  out 
over  the  air,  it  cannot  be  recalled,  re-edited,  or  done  over 
again.  This  is  a  limitation  from  which  film,  fortunately,  does 
54 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 


not  suffer.  Also,  in  film  production,  the  burden  of  carrying  off 
an  easy,  natural,  sustained  performance  is  not  as  trying  to 
the  amateur-actor,  given  proper  direction,  as  it  is  in  television. 

In  short,  although  television  potentially  has  an  immediacy 
and  a  directness  which  film  cannot  duplicate  today,  television 
will  always  have  to  lean  upon  motion  picture  techniques  for 
flexibility  which  is  not  inherent  in  the  new  medium. 

Many  television  people  look  to  films  as  a-  means  of  cutting 
down  the  high  cost  of  producing  "live"  telecasts.  Although 
there  are  film-wise  people  in  television  today,  a  great  many 
other  people  associated  with  the  new  art  do  not  sufficiently 
appreciate  the  costs  of  film  production.  Whether  pre-filming 
will  actually  afford  material  savings  to  television  companies 
remains  to  be  seen.  However,  pre-filming  will  prove  a  boon 
where  studio  and  rehearsal  facilities  are  limited.  It  will  also 
ease  the  problem  of  personnel  allocation  during  the  actual 
telecast. 

The  usefulness  of  television  in  the  classroom  will  depend 
to  a  large  extent  upon  the  production  of  less  costly  receivers 
and  the  availability  of  large-screen  receivers.  The  production 
of  these  is  merely  a  matter  of  time,  as  is  also  the  production  of 
color  television. 

To  meet  immediate  possibilities  for  television,  the  program 
"Air  and  Air  Pressure"  was  prepared  as  a  television  film-pro- 
ject. It  is  designed  to  demonstrate  a  few  scientific  principles 
by  means  of  things  which  are  available  in  the  home  environ- 
ment. It  may  be  used  as  a  guide  for  classroom  demonstrations. 

55 


RADIO    AND 
TELEVISION 


AIR   AND 
AIR   PRESSURE 

A  Tele-Science  Production 

Pnotoorapned  and  produced  by 
Julius  and  Naomi  Postal 


All  ^ 

we  want 

to  do  is  to 

show  you  a  lew 

simple  demon - 

strations  wKicli  you  can               | 

staC»e 

in  your 

own  home. 

More 

detailed 

information 

can  hi 

?  found  i 

in  textbooks. 

(Music  under  the  following  titles) 
Opening  Title:  air  and  air  pressure* 
Second  Title:  a  tele-science  production 
Third   Title:    photographed    and    produced    by 

JULIUS     AND     NAOMI     POSTAL 

Fourth  Title:  all  we  want  to  do  is  to  show  you 

A  FEW  SIMPLE  DEMONSTRATIONS  WHICH  YOU 
CAN  STAGE  IN  YOUR  OWN  HOME.  MORE  DETAILED 
INFORMATION    CAN    BE    FOUND    IN    TEXTBOOKS. 

*  This  is  part  of  an  actual  script  of  a  television  broadcast.  ( The  left-hand 
column  represents  the  "video",  or,  visual  component  of  the  telecast— what 
would  be  seen  on  the  viewer  of  the  television  receiver.  The  right-hand  column 
is  the  narration  to  be  spoken  to  explain  and  supplement  the  "video".)  The 
narration  has  now  been  recorded  on  film  and  the  entire  program  is  available 
as  a  standard  16mm.  sound  film  which  can  be  run  on  any  standard  sound 
projector.  It  is  available  through  The  American  Museum  of  Natural  History, 
New  York,  N.  Y.  ( Copyright  1946  by  Julius  and  Naomi  Postal. ) 

56 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 


TITLE:  SOAP  BUBBLES 

A  tumbler  of  soap-suds  with 
a  bubble  pipe  sticking  out  of 
the  tumbler.  Someoneis blow- 
ing into  the  pipe  but  we  can- 
not see  his  face, 

DIFFERENT      ANGLE:      BubblcS 

stream  over  the  side  of  the 
tumbler  onto  the  table. 

MEDIUM  shot:  a  small  boy  is 
blowing  a  long  festoon  of 
bubbles  which  pyramid  down 
to  the  table. 


This  boy  is  demonstrating  a 
well-known  phenomenon.  He 
is  blowing  air  through  a  bub- 
ble pipe  into  soapy  water.  The 
air  rises  in  the  form  of  glob- 
ules surrounded  by  a  very 
thin,  taut  film  of  soapsuds. 

Every  molecule  in  the  soapy 
film  strongly  attracts  every 
other  molecule  in  the  film. 

The  air  inside  each  soap  bub- 
ble is  under  pressure— greater 
than  that  of  the  surrounding 
atmosphere. 

57 


RADIO    AND 
TELEVISION 


A  single  large  bubble  grows     The  pressure  of  the  air  inside 
upward  out  of  the  pipe  bowl,     the    bubble    is    further    in- 
creased because  the  soap  film 
tends  to  contract  and  shrink 
inward. 


MEjyivM  SHOT  of  Mother  blow-  You'll  notice  that  Mother  is 
ing  bubbles  through  wand-  not  using  a  regulation  bubble 
like  affair  at  camera.  pipe.   She   doesn't   have   to, 

because  glycerine  and  other 
chemicals  have  been  added  to 
the  bubble  fluid  to  increase 
the  surface  tension  and  cause 
bubbles  to  form  more  readilv. 
( 2  second  pause )  These  bub- 
bles will  last  longer,  before 
bursting,  than  those  formed 
with  ordinary  soapy  water. 
58 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 


Starting  with  low  angle  shot.     There's  just  no  trick  to  it  at 

aU: 


Daddy's  hands  insert  four 
ordinary  soda  straws  into  a 
jar  containing  some  bubble 
liquid. 

Daddy's  hands  begin  to  lift 
the  straws  out  of  the  bubble 
liquid. 


Anybody  can  do  it. 

Yes,  anybody,  including  Dad- 
dy can  do  it.  But  Daddy  has 
to  experiment.  Will  it  work 
with  ordinary  soda  straws? 
What   do   you   think?   .    .    . 


LONG  SHOT,  from  side:  Daddy     Daddy  gets  more  bubbles,  but 
lifts  the  four  straws  to  his  lips,     they  are  smaller. 


A  cascade  of  small  bubbles     Bubble  pipes  may  serve  no 
issues  from  the  straws.  other  purpose  than   amuse- 

ment.   On   the   other   hand, 

59 


RADIO    AND 
TELEVISION 


LONG  SHOT  of  tof  of  Washing 
machine.  The  agitator  is 
working.  On  top  of  the  water 
is  a  layer  of  creamy  suds  that 
appears  to  he  two  or  three 
inches  thick. 


Identical  set-up  as  in  previous 
shot.  Mothers  arm  enters 
frame.  She  draws  her  hand 
through  the  layer  of  foam, 
leaving  a  long  trail,  then  lifts 
up  a  handful  of  the  very 
fluffy  suds. 


bubbles  in  the  laundry  may 
indicate  whether  a  tubful  of 
water  is  ready  to  do  the  wash 
efficiently. 

Most  laundry  soaps  and  pow- 
ders will  lather  richly  if  the 
water  is  "soft"  and  at  the  right 
temperature. 

Generous  bubbling  indicates 
that  the  soap  is  well  distrib- 
uted throughout  the  water. 
The  foam  is  now  very  light 
and  fluffy.  There  is  soap  in 
this  foam,  but  in  the  main,  it 
consists  of  hundreds  of  thou- 
sands, perhaps  millions,  of 
tiny  globes  of  air. 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 


TITLE:  AIR  PUSHES  EGG  INTO  MILK  BOTTLE 


MEDIUM  SHOT  of  Mother  tear- 
ing a  newspaper  into  strips 
and  pushing  the  strips  loosely 
into  a  milk  bottle. 


Peter,  the  cat,  watches  in- 
tently. 


You  can  try  this  simple  ex- 
periment with  air  pressure  in 
your  own  home. 

A  hard-boiled  egg,  from 
which  the  shell  has  been  re- 
moved, is  big  enough  to  seal 
the  mouth  of  the  milk  bottle, 
yet  sufficiently  yielding  to 
squeeze  through  the  neck  of 
the  bottle  when  pushed  in  by 
air  pressure. 

Peter,  the  family  cat,  who 
loves  to  eat  eggs,  watches 
hungrily.  Mother  will  give 
him  the  egg,  after  she  re- 
trieves it  from  the  bottle. 

61 


RADIO    AND 
TELEVISION 


Matches  are  struck  and 
brought  to  the  bottle's  mouth. 

ultra-close-up:  The  matches 
are  lowered  into  the  neck  of 
the  bottle. 

The  newspaper  strips  are  seen 
burning  brightly  inside  the 
bottle. 


The  plan  is  to  create  a  partial 
vacuum  within  the  bottle  so 
that  the  external  air  pressure 
will  cause  the  egg  to  be 
sucked  inside.  We  can  accom- 
plish this  by  burning  strips 
of  paper  inside  the  bottle.  The 
heated  air  wall  expand  and 
some  of  it  will  be  driven  out. 


The   egg   is   placed   in 
mouth  of  the  bottle. 


the  Once  the  egg  is  in  place,  the 
flame  will  suffocate  and  go 
out.  The  expanded  air  will 
cool  off  and  shrink  in  volume, 
thus  giving  us  in  the  bottle 
the  partial  vacuum  we  need. 


62 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 


CLOSE  up:  By  stop-motion 
photography  the  eggs  de- 
scent into  the  milk  bottle  is 
speeded  up.  After  oozing,  as 
it  were,  through  the  neck,  it 
drops  suddenly  into  the  bot- 
tom of  the  bottle. 


This  process  usually  takes 
several  minutes.  Stop-motion 
photography  speeds  up  the 
action. 


LONG  shot:  Peter,  the  cat,  is 
eating  the  remains  of  the  egg 
out  of  a  dish. 


Peter,  the  patient  cat,  gets 
the  egg  after  Mother  removes 
it  from  the  bottle  with  a  fork. 
Columbus  may  have  made  an 
egg  stand  on  end,  but  111  bet 
he  never  knew  that  trick! 


63 


RADIO    AND 
TELEVISION 


TITLE:  AIR  PRESSURE  CRUSHES   CAN 

A  five-gallon  can  is  lifted  onto  How  strong  is  a  tin  can?  In  a 
a  gas  range.  A  glassful  of  moment  well  see  what  10,000 
water  is  poured  into  it.  The  pounds  of  atmospheric  pres- 
flame  is  applied  to  the  gas  sure  will  do  to  it.  By  the  way, 
burner.  that's  the  pressure  normally 

exerted  by  the  air  on  a  can  of 
this  size  at  sea  level  — 15 
pounds  per  square  inch— or 
10,000  pounds  over  its  entire 
surface. 


LONG   shot:    Steam  is   seen 
issuing  from  the  can. 


To  create  a  partial  vacuum  in 
the  can,  we  shall  boil  this 
water  over  the  gas  burner, 
and  let  the  expanding  steam 
drive  out  the  air. 

This  will  take  several  minutes. 


64 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 


Camera  tilts  upward  until  If  you  try  this  in  your  own 
steam  fills  most  of  the  frame,  home,  be  very  careful,  be- 
cause both  the  can  and  the 
steam  get  very  hot.  After  the 
vapor  has  been  coming  out 
for  two  or  three  minutes,  the 
next  step  is  to  screw  on 
the  cap  quickly  and  turn  oflF 
the  flame. 

LONG  shot:  The  can  slowly     The  steam  will  now  condense 
begins  to  buckle.  and  return  to  its  original  state 

—water.  (Pause)  Since  we 
drove  out  the  air  previously, 
a  partial  vacuum  results. 

The  can  is  now  seen  severely     Here  is  the  can,  crushed  by 
buckled  and  distorted.  10,000  pounds— or  five  tons— 

of  air  pressure. 
( End  title  with  music )  65 


V.  L/ramatic  Presentations 


DRAMATICS  AS  a  method  of  curriculum  enrichment  is 
not  new.  Children  have  always  liked  to  "make  believe,"  to 
act,  to  project  themselves  into  all  kinds  of  adventures.  They 
enjoy  improvising  and  need  no  scenery  or  costumes  to  make 
the  situation  a  real  one  to  them.  They  are,  for  the  time  being, 
the  characters  they  portray.  A  home-made  microphone  is  all 
that  is  necessary  for  a  radio  program,  and  even  the  micro- 
phone can  be  imagined!  Radio  programs  planned  and  pre- 
sented by  boys  and  girls  have  strong  appeal  in  creative  expres- 
sion, are  eflFective  in  a  review  of  work,  and  create  a  deep 
interest  in  the  area  or  areas  of  study  presented.  Book  reviews, 
poetry  hours,  original  stories,  plays,  choral  reading  and  public 
speaking,  take  on  added  interest  through  this  medium.  If 
"television"  is  desired,  stereopticon  or  kodachrome  slides  may 
be  used  to  produce  the  eflFect  and  add  further  enrichment. 

STAGE  PRESENTATIONS.  In  an  impromptu  stage  play, 
a  table,  chairs,  and  the  suggestion  of  costumes  are  all  that  are 
needed.  The  imagination  of  the  children  will  supply  the  rest. 
Perhaps  that  is  why  Chinese  plays  and  Chinese  paintings  can 
always  be  understood  and  appreciated  by  children.  They  are 
able  to  feel  and  interpret  the  dramatic  and  painted  scenes  in 
the  way  the  authors  and  painters  meant  them  to  do. 

When  costumes  and  scenery  are  possible  in  a  drajnatic  pres- 
entation, whether  tableau  or  "living  picture",  or  the  stage 
play,  the  visual  appeal  is  stronger  and— linked  with  the  audio 

67 


DRAMATIC 
PRESENTATIONS 


appeal— enables  dramatics  to  become  a  powerful  stimulus  and 
aid  in  education.  The  enthusiasm  which  the  simplest  dramatic 
presentation  kindles  is  in  itself  a  guarantee  to  happy  and  effec- 
tive learning  and  also  a  relaxing,  therapeutic  experience. 

Through  dramatizations,  reticent  children  are  often  "drawn 
out  of  themselves"  and  their  self-consciousness,  and  induced 
to  spontaneous  self-expression  under  happy  conditions.  The 
pageant,  especially  the  community  pageant,  in  which  chil- 
dren of  various  nationalities  often  take  part,  promotes  social 
tolerance  and  understanding  as  well  as  develops  dramatic 
instincts  and  abilities.  The  pageant  and  operetta  usually  com- 
bine the  cultural  languages  of  all  nations— drama,  art,  music 
and  the  dance.  All  those  who  deal  with  children  know  how 
versatile  they  are  in  all  these  media,  how  happy  in  each 
method  of  creative  expression.  Art,  music,  the  dance,  speech 
and  diction  are  effectively  integrated. 


STORY  TELLING.  Every  good  dramatic  presentation— 
whether  radio  play,  stage  play,  tableau,  pageant  or  operetta 
—has  at  its  heart  the  story.  The  sound  effects  of  the  radio  play 
help  the  visual  imagination,  just  as  the  scenery  and  costumes 
of  the  stage  play  add  true  visual  appeal  to  the  audio,  help 
interpret  the  story  and  make  it  vivid,  for  plays  are  stories  in 
action. 

Stories,  presented  graphically  and  dramatically,  are  helpful 
in  any  area  of  the  curriculum,  for  there  is  inherent  in  every 
68 


STORY 
TELLING 

boy  and  girl  a  keen  sense  of  the  dramatic.  Whatever  is  told 
them  in  a  vivid,  living  way  will  never  be  forgotten. 

In  the  middle  ages  the  story-teller,  favorite  of  kings  and 
queens,  lords  and  ladies  as  well  as  of  boys  and  girls,  made 
vivid  before  his  audience  banqueting  within  the  tapestried 
and  torch-lighted  hall,  a  jousting  scene  or  tournament  with 
brave  knights  contending;  or  the  song-story  of  Aucassin  and 
his  fair,  sweet  lady  Nicolette.  In  like  manner  the  story-teller 

Story  telling  by  the  author  Dr.  Chandler  in  an  Audio- Visual  En- 
richment Program  in  Hunter  College  Elementary  School  evokes 
an  enthusiastic  response  from  her  young  audience. 


DRAMATIC 
PRESENTATIONS 

of  today  interprets  and  vitalizes  art,  music,  the  sciences, 
history,  and  hterature  for  boys  and  girls.  Through  the  story 
the  people  of  long  ago  become  real  and  alive.  There  is  a  better 
understanding  and  enjoyment  of  the  creations  of  their  hands 
and  minds  and  hearts.  How  much  more  vivid  a  story  may  be- 
come when  visual  aids— stereopticon  and  kodachrome  slides, 
color-prints,  habitat  groups,  dioramas  and,  most  important  of 
all,  realia— add  their  appeal. 

For  example,  a  story  about  Crusaders  becomes  so  much 
more  real  and  vital  when,  through  visual  aids,  the  audience 
sees  a  suit  of  armor  made  of  thousands  of  carefully  welded 
metal  links,  like  that  worn  by  King  Richard  of  the  Lion  Heart! 
A  glimpse  of  the  great  hall  of  a  castle  with  jester,  serving  man, 
knight  and  fair  lady,  torch  light  shining  upon  tapestried  walls, 
gives  the  visual  setting  for  the  dramatic  audio-appeal  of  the 
story,  and  increases  its  imaginative  stimulus.  A  well-planned 
illustrated  introduction  to  the  story  also  may  be  used  as  an 
eflFective  way  to  lead  into  the  narrative. 

It  does  not  seem  necessary  to  add  that  the  story  should  be 
vivid  and  dramatic,  that  the  action  should  move  clearly  and 
swiftly  as  the  story-teller  loses  himself  in  the  characters  of  the 
story  who  skillfully  play  their  parts. 

PUPPETS.  The  story,  again,  is  the  core  of  the  puppet  show, 
in  which  the  spoken  word  is  of  great  importance,  although 
the  technique  of  the  story-telling  is  difFerent.  In  puppet  story- 
telling the  voices  which  help  in  the  various  parts  must  be 
70 


PUPPET 
SHOWS 


exaggerated  to  the  same  extent  as  the  figure  characters. 
Puppetry  may  be  traced  far  back  into  the  days  of  old.  For 
centuries,  and  in  many  diiferent  parts  of  the  world,  puppet 
shows  have  been  given  before  appreciative  audiences  of  old 
and  young  alike.  We  tend  to  think  of  such  exhibitions  as  being 

Participation  in  a  puppet  show  is  an  opportunity  to  combine  art 
and  drama. 


DRAMATIC 
PRESENTATIONS 


designed  for  the  delectation  of  young  folk,  but  in  the  Orient 
adult  audiences  sit  for  hours  enthralled  by  the  gestures  and 
movements  of  skillfully  manipulated  figures.  In  Bali  the 
shadow  play  occupies  the  place  filled  in  occidental  life  by  the 
motion  picture;  in  China,  shadow  puppets  made  of  donkey- 
skin  parchment  were  first  presented  to  entertain  aristocratic 
ladies  who  could  not  leave  their  homes  to  attend  the  theater. 
Puppet  shows  were  a  popular  form  of  entertainment  in  Asia 
and  in  Europe  for  many  years.  The  Punch-and-Judy  show  is 
another  type  of  puppet  show  which  has  long  enjoyed  favor, 
and  today  there  is  a  revival  of  interest  in  this  form  of  artistry. 

HAND  PUPPETS.  Today  puppets  and  puppet-shows  have 
a  distinct  contribution  to  make  to  audio-visual  enrichment 
programs.  The  simple  hand  puppet,  consisting  of  a  head  with 
a  costume-body  into  which  a  child  may  thrust  his  hand  is 
easily  made  by  the  pupil  and  particularly  effective  with  classes 
of  young  children.  The  heads  may  be  made  of  cloth,  stockin- 
et, balsa  wood  or  paper;  the  costumes  may  be  simple  lengths 
of  cloth  shirred  to  the  head.  These  puppets  are  popular  with 
children  in  pre-school  and  lower  elementary  school  classes. 
Simple  stories  may  be  dramatized  with  puppets  of  this  type, 
and  lessons  "acted  out."  One  good  practice  is  to  make  hand 
puppets  of  favorite  characters  from  story  books  and  then  to 
enact  the  stories  themselves.  This  procedure  enables  a  child 
to  visualize  stories  which  have  been  told  to  him  or  which  he 
is  just  learning  to  read. 
72 


PUPPET 
SHOWS 


STRING  PUPPETS.  String  puppets  are  more  complex  to 
make  and  operate,  but  they  are  effective  visual  media.  They 
have  a  greater  appeal  for  older  children  than  do  hand  puppets, 
and  some  very  fine  puppets  have  been  made  in  high  school 
art  classes.  They  may  be  mere  simple  figures,  or  they  may 
be  intricately  carved  and  carefully  costumed.  The  production 
of  a  puppet  show,  with  string  puppets,  affords  an  opportunity 
to  combine  work  done  in  art,  English,  and  dramatics  classes; 
it  is  also  a  splendid  project  for  a  dramatic  club  to  undertake. 

Research  and  study  are  necessary  in  order  to  make  repre- 
sentative figures,  correctly  costumed.  Craftsmanship  of  a  high 
order  is  essential  to  insure  carefully  molded  or  carved  figures. 
Attention  must  be  given  to  speech  and  diction  by  the  students 
who  are  to  act  as  "voices"  of  the  puppets.  The  successful 
manipulation  of  the  strings  controlling  the  puppets  requires 
coordination  and  timing— all  of  which  afford  good  training  for 
students  participating  in  these  programs. 

Recently  a  very  effective  puppet  show  dealing  with  dental 
hygiene  has  been  given  in  many  of  the  schools  of  New  York 
City.  Many  lessons  might  well  be  dramatized  and  made  more 
graphic  if  presented  as  puppet  shows.  There  is  no  reason  why 
the  puppet  characters  and  story  script  should  not  deal  with 
actual  social  situations  and  personal  problems  encountered 
by  children  as  well  as  with  fictional  stories.  We  have  here  a 
visual  medium  which  has  not  been  fully  utilized  by  the  schools, 
and  which  should  be  included  to  a  greater  extent  as  part  of 
the  audio-visual  program. 

73 


VI.  ireasure   irips 
Example  oi  Trip 


M  O  S  T  E  F  F  E  C  T I V  E  of  all  the  types  of  audio-visual  enrich- 
ment is  the  "Treasure  Trip",  the  school  trip  or  journey.  It 
has  been  highly  approved  from  very  early  times.  John  Com- 
enius,  "Father  of  Visual  Education,"  w^hose  Orbis  Pictus 
of  1638  was  the  first  illustrated  book,  commended  it.  The  edu- 
cator, Jean  Jacques  Rousseau  of  the  eighteenth  century,  advo- 
cated it  in  his  "Education  of  Emile",  and  Johann  Heinrich 
Pestalozzi,  the  Swiss  educational  reformer  of  the  late 
eighteenth  and  early  nineteenth  centuries,  approved  it. 

School  trips  or  journeys  were  used  in  English  education  as 
long  ago  as  1905  and  1908.  France  and  Belgium  developed 
this  type  of  visual  aid  before  World  War  II  more  extensively 
than  did  the  United  States.  Short  and  long  trips  were  prac- 
tised, even  inter-school  visits,  pupil  exchanges,  and  youth 
hostels,  which  have  also  been  encouraged  here. 

Some  still  feel  that  all  education  should  be  in  the  school- 
room, and  that  community  agencies  such  as  museums,  li- 
braries, historical  sites,  markets,  botanical  gardens,  shipping 
departments,  factories  are  not  a  vital  part  of  education.  Mod- 
ern educators,  however,  now  realize  the  intrinsic  value  of  this 
reality  of  experience,  although  the  problems  of  sufficient  time 
and  heavy  school  schedules  often  prevent  its  effective  use. 

An  important  objective  in  education  is  that  our  boys  and 
girls  know  their  immediate  environment,  its  history,  ideals 
and  achievements  reflected  in  places  and  monuments  of 

75 


TREASURE 
TRIPS 


artistic,  historic,  literary,  civic,  industrial,  commercial,  and 
recreational  interest.  That  knowledge  can  best  be  acquired 
through  direct  experience,  through  Treasure  Trips  carefully 
planned  and  motivated;  and  carried  out  with  purposeful  and 
meaningful  correlation  with  the  curriculum.  These  provide 
firsthand,  basic  experience  in  the  activities  of  the  children's 
immediate  world,  their  "world  of  reality". 

Of  great  significance  to  everyone  is  a  trip  to  the  United  Nations' 
General  Assembly.  This  is  a  model  of  the  proposed  permanent  UN 
headquarters  in  New  York  City. 


76 


TREASURE 
TRIPS 


Through  this  vital  type  of  audio-visual  enrichment  more 
accurate  information  is  gained  and  retained,  more  interest 
aroused  than  by  any  amount  of  verbal  learning  or,  in  most 
cases,  by  any  other  visual  aid,  although  various  types  of  audio- 
visual aids  are  invaluable  in  preparation  for  the  trip.  School 
becomes  a  part  of  life,  learning  a  happy  experience,  as  pupils 
and  teachers  work  together  in  planning  and  carrying  out  this 
experience.  The  resulting  discussions  are  equally  important 
because  of  the  pupils'  active  participation.  The  richness  of 
individual  experience  in  these  "journeys"  gives  each  child 
something  to  contribute. 

The  school  journey  is  the  most  real  and  the  most  concrete 
of  the  visual  techniques  and  it  is  the  most  accessible  and  often 
the  least  expensive.  It  stimulates  a  desire  for  individual  and 
group  research,  increases  the  power  of  observation,  intensi- 
fies appreciation  of  original  materials  ("treasures")  in  their 
proper  settings,  and  provides  a  clearer  understanding  of  their 
relationships.  This  functional  learning  outside  the  walls  of  the 
schoolroom,  this  most  concrete  of  all  audio- visual  enrichment, 
is  especially  helpful  in  the  development  of  the  units  which 
children  and  teachers  have  chosen.  These  Treasure  Trips  are 
recognized  as  invaluable  in  education,  whether  they  are  group 
or  individual,  whether  in  or  after  school  hours,  when  they  are 
carefully  and  cooperatively  planned  and  executed,  creatively 
followed  up,  and  critically  evaluated.  It  would  hardly  seem 
necessary  to  suggest  that  the  teacher  become  acquainted  with 
the  material,  the  goal  of  the  trip,  before  the  class  visit. 

77 


TREASURE 
TRIPS 


"TREASURE  HOUSES''  OF  RE  ALIA.  There  are  mu- 
seums and  libraries,  historic  sites,  and  monuments  in  most  of 
our  cities  and  towns  where  treasures  have  only  potential  value 
unless  they  are  enjoyed.  The  word  "Museum''  in  the  minds  of 
adults  even  today  too  often  connotes  merely  a  storehouse  of 
ancient  objects  divorced  from  life.  That  feehng  is  partly  due 

Nature  study  at  the  zoo  draws  the  undivided  attention  of  city 
children. 


■■ 

BpP* 

^^^^H|P 

^^^^■^^iH^^n 

^^^^^^^^^^Hk^H^ 

fe  ^^.-i^H^H^BI^^Bi 

gk. 

^ 

ta>"        ilHi^^^^^^E^^v  ^ 

^m^ 

f^Kr                   '^''' 

jfiflF         ^^^^^^» ^^^^^^g 

f       iJHHH^BjMiHttiii 

■■HiHli^Mi 

78 


TREASURE 
TRIPS 


to  an  attitude  which  has  developed  on  the  part  of  the  pubUc, 
but  is  more  often  the  responsibihty  of  museum  officials  who 
have  considered  their  treasures  alone,  rather  than  the  people 
to  whom  these  treasures  partly  belong.  To  the  youth  of  this 
generation,  an  art  museum  is  not  a  storehouse  of  statues  on 
pedestals,  of  pictures  encased  in  deep  and  wide  gilded  frames 
so  high  on  the  walls  that  they  cannot  be  seen,  or  of  treasures 
arranged  with  little  thought  for  the  convenience  and  capacity 
of  the  beholder  for  personal  enjoyment.  It  is  a  Treasure  House 
full  of  light  and  color,  of  ancient  and  modern  treasures  ar- 
ranged with  the  spectator  in  mind  and  the  purpose  of  reflect- 
ing the  lives  of  those  who  created  them.  A  museum  of  natural 
history  simulates  life  itself  in  its  habitat  groups,  models  and 
dioramas  with  their  natural  settings  and  exactness  of  scale 
and  color.  Museums  of  science  and  industry  appeal  to  the 
sense  of  touch  as  well  as  to  those  of  seeing  and  hearing  in  their 
mechanical  models  which  the  visitor  may  manipulate.  Most 
museums  feel  that  children  should  be  allowed  and  encouraged 
to  enjoy  their  finest  treasures. 

Botanical  Gardens  for  nature  study  classes,  the  zoo  for  the 
younger  children,  airports,  harbors,  markets,  city  halls,  civic 
centers,  churches,  factories,  restaurants  where  food,  music,  and 
costume  are  like  glimpses  of  other  lands,  offer  Treasure  Trips 
which  will  humanize  and  vitahze  every  area  of  the  curriculum. 


79 


Model  in  the  Metropolitan  Museum  of  Art  ( New  York )  of  a  castle 
banqueting-hall  which  vividly  portrays  a  phase  of  life  in  the  Mid- 
dle Ages. 

( This  Treasure  Trip  is  not  suggested  for  any  one  age  level, 
but  should  be  adapted  by  the  teacher  for  Elementary,  Junior 
or  Senior  High  School  groups,  to  make  use  of  the  audio- visual 
materials  in  the  specific  community  in  which  the  school  is 
located. ) 

As  an  example,  consider  a  trip  in  New  York  City  back  to  the 
days  of  Knights  and  Pages,  Castles,  and  Cathedrals.  Other 
cities  and  towns  would  have  other  Treasure  Trips  for  the  en- 
richment of  chosen  areas  in  the  curriculum.  In  outlying  dis- 
80 


EXAMPLE    OF 
TRIP 


tricts  where  such  Trails  as  this  are  impossible,  "Imaginary 
Treasure  Trips"  may  be  taken  through  the  help  of  audio-visual 
aids  which  may  be  procured  from  various  sources.* 

Before  the  trip,  discussion  in  class  has  integrated  social 
studies,  language  arts,  art,  and  arts  and  crafts.  It  has  vitalized 
those  areas  by  pupil  and  teacher  research  and  by  carefully 
selected  and  arranged  stereopticon  or  kodachrome  slides  of 
castles,  cathedrals,  lords  and  ladies  in  medieval  costume, 
knights  in  armor  active  in  jousts  and  tournaments.  Some  chil- 
dren will  have  brought  from  home  pictures  of  knights  in 
armor,  of  castles  with  drawbridge  and  moat,  of  hunting  and 
hawking  parties,  of  banquets  in  castle  halls.  The  teacher  will 
have  acquainted  herself  with  the  museum  treasures,  either 
by  herself  or  under  the  guidance  of  the  museum  instructor. 

Then  the  trip  itself  which,  through  careful  planning,  has 
the  eager  attention  of  the  group,  and  minimum  fatigue,  since 
too  many  treasures  have  not  been  included  for  the  one  visit. 
Boys  and  girls  of  today  are  transported  back  into  those  colorful 
days  of  the  Middle  Ages.  In  the  Metropolitan  Museum  of 
Art  they  see  knights  in  chain  and  plate  armor  made  by  artist- 
armorers  who  combined  utility  and  beauty.  How  vivid  the 
glimpse  given  of  a  castle  banqueting-hall  by  a  lighted  model 
which  shows  dais,  jester,  serving  man,  page,  lord  and  lady, 
even  the  fire  upon  the  castle  floor  reflected  upon  the  tapestries 
which  decorate  the  walls!  A  model  of  a  cathedral,  a  com- 
munity work  erected  to  the  worship  of  God  by  builders,  sculp- 

*  See  Chapter  XVI. 

81 


TREASURE 
TRIPS 

tors  and  craftsmen  who  gave  of  their  very  best  for  its  perfec- 
tion, takes  added  meaning  when  compared  with  New  York's 
great  Cathedral  of  Saint  John  the  Divine  *  with  its  glorious, 
colorful  windows,  its  towers,  and  sculptured  doorways.  A  trip 
there  is  promised  for  next  time! 

As  a  climax,  a  visit  to  the  Cloisters  is  planned— a  Treasure 
Trip  for  another  day  not  too  far  distant  so  that  the  continuity 
will  not  be  broken.  There,  each  religious  figure,  the  loving 
work  of  a  medieval  sculptor,  stands  in  its  niche  alone,  that  it 
may  make  its  religious  and  artistic  message  felt  more  deeply. 
There  tapestries  tell  their  stories  and  delight  the  eye  in  pat- 
tern and  color,  their  gold-covered  threads  sparkling  as  they 
did  when  they  decorated  castle  halls;  as  the  Httle  make-be- 
heve  tapestries  seemed  to  do  in  the  model  of  the  castle  hall. 
Statues,  colorful  windows,  tapestries,  the  echoing  cloisters 
some  seven  hundred  years  old,  and  a  beautiful  old  garden- 
all  re-create  that  long-ago  period  and  give  it  meaning.  There 
is  definite  multi-sensory  appeal  through  the  eyes,  through  the 
touch— for  although  fingers  may  not  actually  rest  upon  stone 
drapery,  flesh  or  gold-covered  tapestry  threads,  the  appeal  to 
the  touch  is  there.  And  there  is  appeal  to  the  ears  in  the  echo  of 
steps  on  the  stone  floors,  in  the  very  silence  of  those  cloistered 
halls.  The  rush  and  roar  of  the  modern  city  are  silenced,  and 
the  contemplative  quiet  of  the  thirteenth  and  fourteenth  cen- 
turies pervades  the  senses. 

*  St.  John's  Cathedral-New  York  City,  Amsterdam  Avenue,  at  112th  Street, 
or  any  cathedral  or  church  patterned  after  medieval  church  architecture. 

82 


EXAMPLE    OF 
TRIP 


DISCUSSION.  Following  each  trip  another  discussion  in- 
cludes each  member  of  the  group— eager  contributions  given 
spontaneously,  comparisons  of  medieval  life  with  that  of  today, 
or  armored  knights  with  our  modern  knights  of  land,  sea  and 
air.  Free  creative  work  follows  in  individual  and  group  re- 
search, in  writing,  building,  painting,  modeling,  weaving, 
slide-making— all  inspired  by  the  Treasure  Trail. 

At  the  Cloisters  (New  York)  a  guide  aids  a  group  to  appreciate 
fully  the  wealth  of  treasures  to  be  found  there. 


83 


vii.Xnree-Dimensional  Aids 
and  Realia 


^ 


i 


ITISTOBE  regretted  that  to  many  people  engaged  in  edu- 
cational work  the  mention  of  visual  or  audio-visual  aids 
immediately  calls  to  mind  the  motion  picture.  The  motion 
picture  is  an  extremely  important  aid  to  teaching  and  one 
which  helps  to  vitalize  much  of  the  subject  matter  taught  in 
all  schools.  But  we  do  need  to  bring  into  use  in  the  classrooms 
of  this  country  more  three-dimensional  teaching  aids,  more 
realia  and  models  and  materials  which  give  a  more  lasting 
impression  than  an  image  flashed  across  a  screen. 

THE  DIORAMA.  The  diorama  (already  defined  on  page 
26)  is  one  of  the  most  helpful  of  visual  aids  when  it  is  de- 
sirable or  essential  to  create  an  illusion  of  reality.  By  means  of 
this  small  group  it  becomes  possible  to  set  up  in  the  classroom, 
scenes  of  life  in  the  far  comers  of  the  earth,  re-creations  of 
scenes  from  the  past  and  representations  of  life  or  countries 
which  might  otherwise  be  hard  to  describe  and  picture. 

To  date  no  statistical  studies  have  been  made  to  evaluate 
the  effectiveness  of  the  diorama.  However,  there  is,  and  al- 
ways has  been,  a  universal  appeal  in  the  miniature  which  stirs 
imaginations  and  lends  reality  to  these  groups.  Children  ac- 
cept a  diorama  with  little  questioning,  and  recognize  that  it 
is  a  representation  of  reality  rather  than  reality  itself. 

Dioramas  may  or  may  not  be  lighted  by  means  of  an  elec- 
tric bulb  set  into  the  top  of  the  case.  One  advantage  in  adding 

85 


THREE-DIMENSIONAL 
AIDS    AND    REALIA 


illumination  to  the  diorama  is  that  it  then  becomes  possible 
for  the  scene  portrayed  to  be  shown  in  a  room  darkened  for 
motion  picture  or  slide  projection.  Attention  may  be  called  to 
the  diorama  from  time  to  time  to  keep  in  mind  the  group  or 
country  which  is  being  shown  in  the  film  or  slide. 

The  use  of  animation  in  a  diorama  is  not  desirable.  Motion 
or  animation  of  any  kind  tends  to  make  the  group  seem  like  a 
toy  contraption  or  gadget  and  detracts  from  the  illusion  of 
reality.  If  the  aim  is  to  teach  mechanical  processes  it  would 
be  better  to  examine  an  actual  machine  or  a  model. 

The  diorama,  first  developed  in  the  museums  of  the  United 
States  about  1912,  was  introduced  into  the  schools  as  part  of 
the  circulating  collections  of  materials  provided  by  the  mu- 
seums. Today  teachers  and  pupils  are  making  dioramas  as 
class  projects,  and  finding  them  practical  and  valuable. 

The  diorama  as  developed  by  the  museums,  and  used  and 
made  by  teachers  and  students,  usually  consists  of  an  oblong, 
box-like  case  with  a  curved  background  and  a  foreground  on 
which  are  placed  modeled  figures  and  accessories.  They  are 
placed  in  front  of  the  background  in  a  forced  perspective 
which  makes  them  appear  to  merge  into  the  background  as 
real  objects  merge  into  a  background  of  sky  and  scenery. 
This  combination  of  curved  background  and  forced  perspec- 
tive is  what  creates  the  illusion  of  reality. 

Flat,  cardboard  boxes  with  cut-out  figures  set  in  grooves 
are  not  dioramas.  They  are  cardboard  cut-outs.  If  used  as  such, 
they  may  have  value  at  times,  but  it  should  be  remembered 


THE 
DIORAMA 

that  few  things  in  this  world  are  absolutely  flat.  Because  it  is 
three-dimensional,  a  true  diorama  gives  depth  and  body  to  a 
scene  which  flat  pictorial  materials  fail  to  do. 

The  diorama  used  alone,  however,  is  not  the  perfect  teach- 
ing aid.  If  specimens  of  clothing,  household  utensils,  jewelry, 
and  ceramics  are  grouped  around  it,  the  visual  appeal  is 
heightened.  Then,  through  added  use  of  motion  pictures, 
slides,  maps,  and  photographs,  the  subjects  will  assume  reality 
in  the  minds  of  students. 

MINIATURE  STAGE-SETS.  Among  the  "forerunners" 
of  the  diorama  were  miniature  stage-sets,  dish  gardens,  models 
of  houses,  gardens  and  temples.  These  are  also  of  value  as 
visual  aids  for  use  in  classrooms.  Stage-sets  have  long  been 
used  in  Enghsh,  literature,  and  dramatics  classes.  It  might  be 
well  if  they  were  used  more  frequently  in  social  studies,  lan- 
guage, and  art  classes.  Historical  episodes  can  be  made  to  take 
on  reality  if  acted  out  by  small  figures  moved  about  on  a 
miniature  stage.  Community  organizations,  groups,  and  gov- 
ernmental agencies  can  be  set  up  on  these  same  small  stage- 
sets  and  made  to  move  about  as  though  meeting  in  regular 
session. 

The  sand-box  provides  an  opportunity  for  early  training  in 
the  use  of  maps.  Whole  communities  and  areas  can  be  marked 
out  and  set  up.  The  sand-box  is  particularly  good  when  the 
class  is  one  of  younger  children.  However,  the  training  of 
young  men  in  our  armed  forces  taught  us  that  sand-boxes  and 

87 


THREE-DIMENSIONAL 
AIDS    AND    REALIA 


models  have  value  with  older  students,  too.  It  is  possible  to 
use  this  material  to  illustrate  any  type  of  lesson  where  dia- 
grams and  plans  are  part  of  the  work.  It  is  easy  to  show  how  a 
town  is  planned,  streets  laid  out,  and  roadways  located  if  a 
sand-box  is  used. 

For  more  elaborate  plans  and  models,  the  table-top  scene  is 


A  miniature  stage-set,  complete  with  characters,  is  here  used  as  a 
clever  advertisement  for  the  "live"  show  to  be  presented  later. 


88 


MODELS,   DOLLS 
COSTUMES,    FURNITURE 

always  useful.  In  this  instance,  a  village,  a  scene,  a  group  of 
people,  can  be  laid  out  on  the  top  of  a  table,  desk  or  case.  A 
group  may  first  be  set  up  on  a  base  of  cardboard  so  that  it  is 
possible  to  move  it  from  place  to  place.  No  background  is 
provided  in  this  instance,  and  the  group  is  actually  a  model. 

MODELS,  DOLLS,  COSTUMES,  FURNITURE, 
RELICS.  In  addition  to  the  table-top  model,  we  may  include 
models  or  representations  of  everything  from  locomotives  to 
washing  machines.  If  the  original  is  something  which  moves,  it 
is  preferable  to  make  the  model  move  in  the  same  way.  Unless 
this  is  so,  the  model  is  only  a  toy  or  ornament  and  has  little 
value  as  a  teaching  aid.  A  good  flat  picture  serves  to  show 
what  an  object  looks  like,  but  a  model  should  show  how  an 
object  moves  and  is  used. 

Dolls,  particularly  those  in  the  costumes  of  the  different 
peoples  of  the  world,  help  to  familiarize  children  with  the 
style  of  dress  and  physical  appearance  of  people  other  than 
themselves.  It  is  well  to  bear  in  mind  that  as  dolls  and  modeled 
figures  of  human  beings  increase  in  size,  they  become  less  life- 
like. Dolls  over  eighteen  inches  in  height  often  seem  very 
artificial  and  do  not  have  as  great  an  appeal  for  children  as 
smaller  ones.  The  costumes  and  clothing  should  be  as  true  as 
possible  to  the  actual  clothing  worn  by  people  whom  they 
represent. 

Dolls  may  either  be  dressed  by  the  children  of  a  class  or 
they  may  be  those  purchased  from  commercial  sources  or 


THREE-DIMENSIONAL 
AIDS    AND    REALIA 


B 

¥ 

1 

w 

in 

'  ^ 

Sm^ 

k'"^ 

pte 

m 

I^EHf^ 

lis 

^■■l^k>.^^^B^^-^   JP^  '^^ 

lusyiam 

Wm 

^^^^H  Guatematn  ^^@H| 

Dolls  and  relics  can  be  displayed  in  classroom  or  hall  showcases. 

acquired  in  the  course  of  travels  to  foreign  countries.  While 
the  costumes  made  by  children  may  not  be  as  perfect  as  those 
made  by  professional  doll-makers,  there  are  many  lessons  to 
be  learned  from  planning  and  making  such  clothing.  Research 
is  necessary  to  verify  types  of  clothing  worn,  and  skill  in  sew- 
ing is  necessary  to  put  the  garments  together.  In  secondary 
schools  students  of  art  and  fashion  design  carry  out  projects 
of  this  nature.  Flat  prints,  slides  and  motion  pictures  may  all 
be  studied  first  before  such  a  project  is  undertaken. 

It  is  difiicult  and  seldom  necessary  to  bring  actual  furni- 
ture into  a  classroom.  Size  and  space  do  not  warrant  the  use  of 
large  pieces  of  furniture,  but  scale  or  miniature  models  may 
be  used  to  serve  the  same  purpose.  Unless  the  class  is  one  in 
home-making,  and  actual  furnished  rooms  are  provided  for 
the  students,  models  of  furniture  serve  to  familiarize  the 
90 


MODELS,   DOLLS 
COSTUMES,    FURNITURE 


Such  an  exhibit  stimulates  student  interest  in  other  peoples. 

students  with  period  styles. 

Relics,  whether  they  be  Indian  arrowheads  or  grand- 
mother's wedding-shoes,  always  have  an  appeal  for  children. 
The  actual  handling  of  material  from  another  age  and  people 
provides  a  learning  experience  hard  to  duplicate.  It  is  the  old 
story  of  firsthand  evidence  being  the  most  important.  Wher- 
ever possible,  an  attempt  should  be  made  to  gather  as  many 
relics  or  artifacts  as  are  available.  An  appeal  to  parents  and 
adults  will  often  reveal  unsuspected  sources  of  supply  of 
these  materials.  If  the  specimens  are  irreplaceable,  they  can 
be  arranged  in  a  cabinet  as  a  special  exhibit,  but  an  attempt 
should  always  be  made  to  secure  some  articles  which  may  be 
passed  around  and  handled.  As  a  teaching  aid,  an  arrowhead 
which  may  be  touched  and  felt  is  twice  as  valuable  as  one 
which  must  be  kept  behind  glass. 

91 


THREE-DIMENSIONA]L 
AIDS    AND    REALIA 

MOUNTED  NATURE  SPECIMENS.  The  ideal  way  to 
study  nature  is  to  go  on  a  field  trip.  But  even  where  this  is 
possible,  it  is  desirable  to  have  mounted  specimens  for  de- 
tailed study  in  the  classroom.  Mounted  specimens  of  birds, 
animals,  reptiles,  insects,  rocks,  may  be  purchased  from  sup- 
ply houses  or  borrowed  from  museums.  In  addition,  students 
should  be  encouraged  to  gather  and  prepare  their  own  collec- 
tions. With  classes  in  the  elementary  schools  this  usually 
means  bringing  together  miscellaneous  objects  and  mounting 
them  on  squares  of  heavy  cardboard  for  safekeeping. 

In  the  case  of  students  in  the  secondary  schools  today  the 
process  may  be  quite  an  elaborate  and  technical  one.  It  is  no 
novelty  for  a  student  to  skin,  prepare  and  mount  birds  and 
animals,  dry  and  pin-mount  butterflies  and  insects,  and  set 
up  a  demonstration  illustrating  a  biological  principle.  This 
practice  should  be  encouraged,  for  here  the  study  involved  in 
preparing  the  visual  aid  is  of  more  value  than  the  aid  itself. 
We  need  specimens  for  purposes  of  identification  but  the 
student  also  needs  to  know  something  about  the  skeletal  struc- 
ture of  these  same  specimens.  This  knowledge  is  not  gained 
through  mere  visual  observation.  Opportunities  must  also  be 
provided  for  analytical  study  of  what  constitutes  the  specimen. 


LIVE  ANIMALS  AND  PLANTS.  No  student,  whether 
of  elementary  school  or  secondary  school  level,  can  be  ex- 
pected to  appreciate  and  understand  natural  objects,  plants 
92 


LIVE    ANIMALS 
AND    PLANTS 


and  animals,  unless  some  provision  is  made  for  him  to  have 
actual  contact  with  these  objects. 

In  the  pre-school  and  lower  grade  levels  living  things  and 
plants  give  the  child  a  concept  of  growth,  of  life,  of  color,  and 
of  beauty  in  his  own  immediate  world. 

In  the  higher  grades  these  same  living,  growing  things  be- 

In  the  primary  grades,  living  things  and  plants  give  the  child  a 
concept  of  growth,  of  life,  of  color,  and  of  beauty  in  his  own  imme- 
diate world. 


THREE-DIMENSIONAL 
AIDS    AND    REALIA 

come  important  for  still  another  reason.  They  provide  a  means 
for  arousing  an  interest  in  nature  study  that  may  carry  over 
into  adult  life.  This  is  especially  valuable  in  the  case  of  city 
schools.  Here  students  often  have  little  or  no  opportunity  for 
field  study  of  plants  and  animals  in  their  native  habitats.  The 
specimens  exhibited  in  terrariums  and  aquariums  should  be 
well  cared  for  and  maintained.  Students  should  be  taught 
early  that  regular  feeding  and  care  of  living  specimens  is  abso- 
lutely essential.  They  must  also  be  instructed  in  the  proper 
care  of  plants. 

If  it  is  deemed  wise  to  maintain  a  nature  room,  with  live 
animals  such  as  squirrels,  mice,  rabbits,  raccoons,  and  grow- 
ing plants,  experienced  advice  should  be  sought  as  to  the  best 
means  of  maintaining  this  type  of  material.  A  nature  room, 
where  all  the  students  in  a  school  may  come  to  observe  the 
specimens  and  become  familiar  with  natural  objects,  is  always 
a  popular  place.  Such  a  room  should  be  considered  an  im- 
portant part  of  the  audio-visual  program  of  a  school. 

MULTI-SENSORY  APPEAL.  The  materials  described  in 
this  chapter  appeal  as  "multi-sensory"  aids.  Their  value  lies 
not  alone  in  the  visual  attraction,  but  in  the  many  different 
ways  by  which  they  can  be  used  to  arouse  student  interest. 

In  any  class  there  is  always  a  group  with  whom  the  visual 
appeal  will  serve  as  the  best  method  of  teaching  a  subject.  An- 
other group  can  better  be  reached  through  the  sense  of  hear- 
ing, and  still  others  need  to  feel  and  handle  materials.  Some 
94 


MULTI-SENSORY 
APPEAL 


will  gain  an  understanding  by  simply  reading  their  textbooks. 
The  classroom  is  thus  a  miniature  world,  made  up  of  dif- 
ferent types  of  child-people.  Teachers  need  to  remember  this 
in  selecting  materials  for  classroom  use.  Whatever  the  abili- 
ties or  intellectual  levels  of  the  students  with  whom  they  are 
dealing,  there  is  some  aid  which,  properly  used,  will  make  the 
subject  under  consideration  richer  and  more  real.  The  best  aid 
to  use  at  any  particular  time  is,  therefore,  the  one  which  gives 
to  the  lesson  the  greatest  degree  of  reality. 


95 


VIII.  1  lome-anc 


1  School-Made 


Aids 


MANY  OF  THE  MOST  valuable  and  effective  teaching 
aids  are  those  which  have  been  made  either  by  the  teachers 
themselves,  by  the  students,  or  by  teachers  and  students  work- 
ing together  after  formal  classroom  time. 

HOBBIES  AND  CLUBS. We  have  long  been  familiar  with 
language,  dramatic  and  social  clubs  as  part  of  the  extra- 
curricular school  program.  Today  there  is  increasing  evidence 
of  the  popularity  of  clubs  devoted  to  the  production  of  radio 
programs,  the  making  of  models,  the  collecting  of  various  ob- 
jects, the  production  of  motion  pictures,  and  craftwork.  These 
clubs  may  be  made  the  sources  for  the  production  of  many  of 
the  things  used  in  the  classrooms  as  teaching  aids.  Individual 
students  or  groups  of  students  with  kindred  interests  should 
be  encouraged  to  develop  hobbies.  Radio  clubs,  camera  clubs, 
stamp  clubs,  nature  clubs,  all  have  a  definite  value  as  part  of 
the  extra-curricular  activities  which  ought  to  be  provided 
in  the  school  program. 

The  greatest  value  to  be  derived  from  these  club  or  hobby 
groups  is  the  interest  aroused  in  doing  things.  Once  this 
interest  is  aroused,  it  becomes  easy  to  set  a  boy  or  girl  to  work 
on  a  craft  project  or  other  activity.  If  the  nature  of  the  club 
activity  is  such  that  the  work  must  be  done  by  the  group  as 
a  whole,  then  valuable  lessons  may  be  learned  in  how  to  work 
together.  If  the  work  is  to  be  done  by  individuals,  then  each 

97 


HOME-    AND    SCHOOL- 
MADE    AIDS 

child  may  either  be  encouraged  to  work  on  something  similar 
to  what  his  fellow  club  members  are  doing,  or  may  carry  out 
some  specific  piece  of  work  which  is  uniquely  his  own. 

In  either  instance,  manual  skills  are  acquired,  social  ameni- 
ties learned  and  observed,  and  the  available  supply  of  school 
materials  increased.  Even  though  the  objects  thus  made 
eventually  become  the  property  of  their  student  makers,  their 
owners  will  proudly  acquiesce  when  asked  to  lend  them  for 
school  exhibits,  special  demonstrations  or  lessons.  Following 
are  some  suggestions  of  audio- visual  aids  which  may  either  be 
made  or  collected  at  home,  or  in  the  classroom  itself,  by  indi- 
vidual students  or  by  school  club  groups. 

STAMPS,  SOUVENIRS,  RELICS,  These  materials  are 
already  made,  but  must  be  collected  and  brought  together  in 
some  order  before  they  take  on  value  as  teaching  aids.  The 
collecting  of  stamps  is  a  hobby  which  has  given  satisfaction 
to  many,  old  and  young  alike.  In  order  to  be  of  value  as  teach- 
ing aids,  the  collections  of  stamps  should  be  arranged  or 
grouped  according  to  rather  clearly  defined  subject  areas.  For 
instance,  "map  stamps"  or  "famous  historical  character  stamps" 
or  similar  groupings  are  good  ways  of  arranging  collections. 
If  a  geographical  grouping  is  desired,  then  perhaps  all  the 
stamps  of  a  particular  country  may  be  brought  together,  and 
a  study  made  to  locate  the  places  and  buildings  shown  on  the 
stamps. 

Collections  of  souvenirs  and  relics  may  be  grouped  in  much 
98 


STAMPS,    SOUVENIRS 
SCRAPBOOKS 

the  same  way  as  stamps.  All  the  different  items  that  are 
gathered  on  visits  to  various  places  of  interest  in  the  com- 
munity often  form  the  nucleus  for  a  school  museum  collection. 
Relics  that  have  been  unearthed  by  seekers  for  historical  in- 
formation about  a  community  may  well  be  added  to  this  col- 
lection. People  in  the  community  are  often  glad  to  contribute 
relics  and  artifacts  of  early  pioneer  days  if  they  are  informed 
of  how  much  these  mean  to  groups  of  students  interested  in 
local  history. 


SCRAPBOOKS.  The  making  of  scrapbooks  should  not  be 
allowed  to  become  mere  busy  work.  Neither  should  the  scrap- 
books  themselves  be  collections  of  unrelated  items.  An  entire 
class  may  participate  in  the  making  of  a  scrapbook,  or  each 
member  of  a  class  may  make  one.  If  a  class  is  working  on  some 
specific  unit,  a  scrapbook  may  be  kept  to  show  how  the  unit 
was  planned  and  carried  out.  In  this  way  it  is  possible  to  have 
a  complete  story,  with  pictures  of  the  various  units  of  work 
done  during  the  term. 

Scrapbooks  may  contain  newspaper  clippings,  photographs, 
drawings  by  children,  letters,  essays,  lists  of  sources  con- 
tacted for  materials,  samples  of  fabrics,  catalogs,  timetables, 
maps,  in  fact,  any  collection  of  items  that  will  help  to  present 
and  tell  a  story.  The  layout  and  preparation  of  a  scrapbook 
offers  a  good  opportunity  for  a  study  of  bookmaking,  printing 
and  illustration. 


HOME-    AND    SCHOOL- 
MADE    AIDS 

LANTERN  SLIDES  AND  PHOTOGRAPHS.  It  may  at 
first  seem  strange  to  classify  lantern  slides  and  photographs 
together.  However,  when  we  are  thinking  of  teaching  aids  that 
may  be  made  in  the  classroom,  much  the  same  thing  may  be 
said  of  both  of  these  aids. 

Both  the  standard  3^4  x  4  inch  and  the  small  2x2  inch 
lantern  slides  may  be  made  by  pupils.  Let  us  consider  first 
the  standard  slide.  This  may  be  made  in  almost  every  class 
from  the  first  grade  through  the  twelfth  grade  high  school.  It 
is  possible  to  purchase  excellent  kits  of  materials  to  use  in 
making  lantern  slides.  These  kits  provide  the  teacher  with 
everything  from  glass,  crayons,  and  paints  to  the  binding  tape 
and  labels. 

The  actual  painting  and  coloring  of  the  lantern  slide  offers 
an  opportunity  to  develop  artistic  skills.  Research  and  plan- 
ning are  also  needed  in  order  to  know  what  to  include  in  the 
slide  picture.  An  excellent  classroom  project  is  the  making  of 
a  set  of  lantern  slides  to  illustrate  the  topic  under  considera- 
tion. 

The  2x2  inch  slides  and  photographs  have  much  in  com- 
mon, for  both  necessitate  the  use  of  a  camera.  This  is  no 
reason  to  refrain  from  making  them  for  school  use,  however, 
for  the  modern  boy  or  girl  is  quite  likely  to  be  an  ardent 
amateur  photographer.  Camera  clubs  are  to  be  found  in  a 
majority  of  the  high  schools  of  the  United  States,  and  exhibits 
of  the  work  done  by  their  student  members  give  proof  of  the 
excellent  standards  maintained.  In  many  instances  the  work 
100 


SLIDES,    PHOTOGRAPHS 
SCHOOL    MOVIES 

exhibited  is  equal  to  that  of  adult  and  professional  camera 
salons. 

If  it  is  possible  to  establish  and  equip  a  darkroom  on  the 
school  premises,  the  entire  photographic  process  from  snap- 
ping the  picture  to  developing  the  negative  and  making  en- 
largements may  be  carried  out  either  by  a  class  or  by  camera 
club  members. 

In  the  case  of  the  2x2  inch  natural  color  lantern  slides^ 
the  film  used  is  a  special  film  which  is  sent  to  the  manufacturer 
for  developing  and  processing.  It  is  good  practice  to  encourage 
the  taking  of  these  pictures,  however,  for  the  students  learn 
to  handle  film,  time  exposures,  observe  color  and  lighting 
effects.  A  good  project  to  undertake  is  the  making  of  a  set  of 
colored  2x2  slides  of  the  school  life,  the  student  body,  and 
the  programs  carried  out  as  a  part  of  the  average  school  day. 
Other  good  projects  include  pictures  taken  while  on  nature 
walks,  and  scenes  of  community  landmarks. 

SCHOOL  ''MOVIES".  In  many  junior  and  senior  high 
schools  today  there  is  often  a  school  "motion  picture  squad" 
on  the  scene  making  motion  pictures  whenever  an  event  of 
importance  takes  place.  Such  squads  may  also  be  seen  filming 
stories  especially  written  and  prepared  to  enrich  particular 
subjects  such  as  science  experiments,  demonstrations  of  cook- 
ing, hat-making,  or  interior  decoration. 

There,  should  be  supervision  and  guidance  by  some  faculty 
member  in  these  film-making  activities.  The  making  of  a 

101 


HOME-    AND    SCHOOL 
MADE    AIDS 


school  movie  involves  many  phases  from  the  planning  of  the 
story,  script- writing  and  casting,  to  the  actual  filming  of  the 
scenes.  If  there  is  no  faculty  member  with  the  requisite  experi- 
ence to  guide  this  work,  an  eflFort  should  be  made  to  secure 
the  assistance  of  a  parent  or  resident  of  the  community.  This 
type  of  activity  is  best  suited  to  the  junior  or  senior  high  school 
level. 

The  English  Department  or  the  Drama  Club  may  be  called 
upon  to  help  with  the  writing  of  the  script.  The  Art  Depart- 
ment is  always  a  source  of  help  for  scenery  and  costumes.  The 
Manual  Arts  Department  should  be  asked  to  help  in  the  mak- 
ing of  props  and  equipment.  Many  groups  and  clubs  may 
assist  in  the  making  of  the  film,  but  there  should  always  be  a 
coordinating  or  supervisory  committee  whose  duty  it  is  to 
follow  the  entire  project  through  from  beginning  to  end. 
Committee  members  must  see  to  it  that  the  actors  are  on  hand 
when  needed,  that  the  script  is  followed,  and  that  necessary 
materials  are  provided. 

The  finished  film  may  seem  slightly  amateurish  to  some,  but 
there  is  always  a  keener  interest  on  the  part  of  students  in  a 
school-made  film  than  in  a  professional  one.  Lessons  are 
learned  in  its  making  which  might  not  otherwise  be  learned— 
what  makes  a  good  picture,  what  to  include  in  a  scene  to  tell 
a  story,  how  to  translate  factual  information  into  visual  pres- 
entation. 

It  is  also  interesting  to  note  that  after  some  experience  in 
making  motion  pictures,  students  become  more  critical  in  their 
102 


SCHOOL 
MOVIES 

observation  of  professional  films.  They  look  for  and  detect  de- 
tails which  previously  went  unnoticed.  They  become  more 
critical  of  films  shown  in  commercial  theaters  and  begin  to 
build  up  for  themselves  standards  by  which  to  judge  all  types 
of  films. 


This  radio  station  at  Brooklyn  ( New  York )  Technical  High  School 
provides  a  sound  basis  for  future  careers. 


103 


HOME-    AND    SCHOOL- 
MADE    AIDS 


RECORDINGS  AND  RADIO.  In  this  modern  age  of 
sound  it  is  often  desirable  to  have  recordings  of  speeches, 
sound  effects,  or  musical  scores  to  accompany  school-made 
motion  pictures.  It  is  possible  to  secure  for  school  use,  not  only 
phonographic  machines  on  which  records  may  be  played,  but 
also  machines  for  the  making  or  cutting  of  these  records.  This 
material  is  not  too  expensive  and  students  may  be  trained  to 
"cut"  recordings  of  orchestral  numbers  and  speeches. 

Students  should  also  be  encouraged  to  make  and  service 
radio  sets  for  school  use.  Here  again  are  examples  of  teach- 
ing materials  which  may  be  made  during  the  formal  class 
period  or  as  a  club  undertaking.  Work  of  this  type  provides 
training  which  has  a  distinct  vocational  and  professional  value 
for  students. 

If  a  good  basic  sound  system  is  installed  in  a  school  build- 
ing, it  can  then  be  the  duty  of  students  to  operate  and  direct 
programs  using  this  system.  Extra  equipment,  microphones 
and  turntables,  can  be  prepared  and  set  up  by  students  under 
the  direction  of  the  teacher  in  charge  of  the  radio  club. 

Many  of  the  radio  operators  and  signal  corps  men  of  our 
army  and  navy  gained  their  first  experience  with  radio  equip- 
ment while  still  in  school  when  they  set  up  an  amateur  receiv- 
ing set  for  the  school  or  for  a  boys'  club.  New  improvements 
are  constantly  being  made  in  this  field  and  the  materials  avail- 
able for  school  use  have  been  greatly  simplified.  The  nature  of 
the  work  done  makes  it  especially  appropriate  for  junior  and 
senior  high  school  classes. 
104 


MAKING 
DIORAMAS 


DIORAMAS.  The  making  of  a  diorama  is  not  a  difficult 
undertaking.  Manual  and  artistic  skills  are  drawn  upon;  re- 
search is  necessary  to  decide  what  should  be  put  in  the 
diorama;  and  craftsmanship  determines  how  it  is  made  and 
put  together.  The  actual  diorama  may  be  a  simple  scene 
illustrating  some  story  studied  in  class  or  showing  life  in  some 
country  studied.  As  the  children  become  more  adept  in  han- 
dling materials,  or  with  older  classes,  the  diorama  made  may 
be  more  elaborate  and  finished. 


High  school  students,  during  their  art  classes,  can  make  dioramas 
for  use  in  other  courses.  Craftsmanship  in  construction  contributes 
to  eflFectiveness  and  reality. 


105 


HOME-    AND    SCHOOL- 
MADE    AIDS 

Many  teachers  who  felt  that  they  had  httle  or  no  artistic 
ability  have  been  surprised  at  the  good  dioramas  they  were 
able  to  produce  when  they  really  tried.  For  some  years  now 
the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History  has  conducted  a 
training  course  in  the  techniques  of  diorama-making.  Teach- 
ers who  reahzed  the  visual  appeal  of  this  aid  have  learned  to 
make  artistic  and  worth-while  dioramas.  They,  in  turn,  have 
passed  this  knowledge  on  to  the  children  in  their  classes. 

A  diorama  made  with  curved,  cardboard  background  and 
simple,  modeled  figures  may  be  made  at  little  expense.  The 
illusion  of  reality  produced  by  these  groups  make  them  ex- 
tremely valuable.  Therefore,  a  true  diorama  should  be  con- 
structed and  not  merely  a  box  with  cut-out  figures.  It  is  highly 
important  in  making  groups  of  this  type  to  observe  this  rule. 

Whether  the  entire  class  cooperates  in  the  making  of  one 
diorama,  or  whether  several  dioramas  are  made  by  small 
groups  of  children  depends  upon  two  factors:  first,  the  amount 
of  time  which  can  be  devoted  to  the  construction  of  the 
diorama,  and  second,  how  many  dioramas  are  really  needed 
for  any  one  class  project.  One  diorama,  well-planned  and  care- 
fully constructed  is  better  than  a  number  of  hastily  put  to- 
gether, flimsy  groups. 

MODELED  FIGURES.  It  seems  almost  superfluous  today 
to  stress  the  value  of  creative  learning,  of  making  things. 
Puppets  and  modeled  and  sculptured  figures  are  a  part  of  the 
heritage  which  has  come  down  to  us  through  the  ages.  Chil- 
106 


MODELED 
FIGURES 


dren,  especially  in  the  elementary  grades,  love  puppet  shows. 
There  is  an  appeal  to  these  figures  which  are  made  to  move  by 
strings  and  sticks  that  is  hard  to  explain. 

Hand  puppets  are  easily  made  and  may  be  little  else  than 
glove-like  cloth  figures  which  are  slipped  over  the  hand  and 
manipulated  by  moving  the  fingers.  These  are  readily  fabri- 
cated by  children  in  the  very  low  grades. 

A  miniature  group  by  a  master  modeler,  Dwight  Franklin.  De- 
picted below  is  the  purchase  of  Manhattan  Island. 


107 


HOME-    AND    SCHOOL- 
MADE    AIDS 

Carved  puppets  require  more  skill  in  the  making  and  are 
better  suited  to  older  children  and  to  members  of  dramatic 
clubs.  Many  beautiful  balsa  wood  puppets  have  been  made 
by  students  for  high  school  dramatic-club  performances.  This 
teaching  aid  should  never  be  classified  as  wholly  belonging 
in  the  elementary  school. 

Children  of  every  age  love  to  carve  and  model  figures, 
whether  the  medium  used  is  modeling  clay,  plasticene,  wood 
or  soap.  Work  of  this  type  provides  an  outlet  for  individual 
artistic  expression  and  should  be  encouraged.  Pupils  should 
be  taken  to  see  famous  statues,  the  work  of  world-renowned 
artists  in  art  museums.  They  should  also  be  taken  to  see  the 
beautifully  mounted  specimens  of  taxidermic  art  in  the  natural 
history  museums.  Exhibits  of  pupil- work  provide  an  incentive 
for  greater  eflForts  in  this  field  and  should  occur  frequently. 

SAND-BOX  SCENES,  MURALS.  Creative  activities 
should  include  the  making  of  many  types  of  objects.  In  some 
instances  it  is  wise  to  make  sand  drawings,  flat  table-top 
scenes  and  simple  murals  before  attempting  to  make  carved 
figures  of  the  type  already  mentioned.  All  of  these  types  of 
creative  work,  however,  have  their  place  in  the  list  of  class- 
room activities. 

It  is  possible  for  groups  of  children  to  cooperate  in  the 
making  of  the  aids  under  immediate  consideration.  This  is  one 
advantage  to  keep  in  mind  when  planning  the  program  of 
work.  Many  hands  may  help  to  make  the  murals  for  a  school- 
108 


MAKING 
MURALS 

room  wall  or  for  an  assembly  program,  such  as  a  pageant. 
Again  it  should  be  remembered  that  the  making  of  these 
materials  is  of  value  only  when  it  contributes  to  the  process 
of  learning— the  acquiring  of  skills,  factual  information,  ap- 
preciation of  arts  and  crafts,  or  when  it  is  used  as  a  means  of 
getting  a  child  to  express  himself.  Visual  aids  of  this  type 
should  not  be  made  simply  to  fill  in  time  or  as  busy  work. 

Truck  farming  on  a  sand  table-top  is  as  absorbing  and  instructive 
as  the  real  thing. 


109 


HOME-    AND    SCHOOL- 
MADE    AIDS 

AQUARIUMS,  TERRARIUMS.  For  many  years  Ellen 
Eddy  Shaw  of  the  Brooklyn  Botanic  Gardens  worked  to  show 
children  how  to  grow  and  care  for  plants.  Her  methods  and 
ideas  have  been  carried  out  by  many  others.  We  have  come  to 
realize  how  important  it  is  for  children,  especially  children 
who  live  in  large  cities,  to  learn  how  to  grow  and  work  with 
living  things.  Pots  of  growing  plants  on  the  window  sill  of  a 
classroom  not  only  provide  a  bit  of  color,  but  they  also  provide 
an  opportunity  to  show  how  things  grow,  how  they  develop. 
The  same  may  be  said  for  all  types  of  nature  study  materials. 
A  thorough  foundation  should  be  laid  in  elementary  schools. 

Will  this  grow  in  our  school  garden?  A  trip  to  the  public  botanical 
gardens  will  increase  interest  in  the  classroom  terrarium. 


iK^_.^._. 

^ 

ip^i    m 

f\ 

no 


AQUARIUMS 
TERRARIUMS 

Aquariums  and  terrariums  should  be  made,  stocked,  and 
cared  for  by  the  pupils  themselves  under  teacher  supervision. 
Actual  firsthand  contact  with  materials  of  this  nature  give  the 
child  a  greater  appreciation  of  nature  study  and  all  that  it 
includes.  Textbooks,  stories,  pictures  or  charts  are  not  ade- 
quate to  give  the  child  the  appreciation  which  comes  through 
contact  with  living,  growing  plants  and  animals. 

The  field  trip  to  woods  and  fields,  parks,  botanical  and 
zoological  gardens  and  similar  places  is,  of  course,  an  ideal 
way  to  show  living,  growing  specimens  to  children.  But  they 
should  also  have  as  much  of  this  material  as  possible  where 
they  may  watch,  observe,  and  care  for  it  themselves  while 
studying  about  it.  They  should  be  encouraged  to  plant  seeds, 
to  collect  and  identify  leaves,  fruits,  flowers,  and  to  stock 
aquariums.  In  other  words,  materials  of  instruction  should 
include  those  objects  which  surround  us  and  which  we  should 
learn  to  know  in  order  to  be  able  to  see  this  world  in  its 
entirety. 


Ill 


.  Enrichment  oi  Social  Studies 


THE  MORE  VIVID  and  human  we  can  make  history  and 
geography,  the  more  vital  those  areas  become  in  the  cur- 
riculum. Word  pictures  of  historical  events  and  personages, 
however  excellent  such  descriptions  may  be,  often  lack  the 
desired  concreteness  of  experience.  Pictures,  stereopticon  and 
kodachrome  slides,  filmstrips,  stereographs,  dioramas,  dra- 
matics on  the  stage,  over  the  air  and  on  the  screen,  stimulate 
interest  in  the  word  pictures  and  make  them  real,  human,  and 
alive. 

If  an  objective  of  education  is  to  develop  the  personality  of 
the  individual  and  fit  him  to  live  successfully  and  happily  with 
other  people  in  the  world,  making  his  definite  contribution  to 
society,  surely  social  studies,  enriched  by  well-selected  and 
related  audio-visual  aids,  are  vital  tools  in  accomplishing  that 
objective.  This  area  in  the  curriculum  has  to  do  with  the  social 
life,  the  thoughts,  deeds,  hopes  and  ideals  of  people.  It  deals 
with  the  social  and  economic  problems  of  the  past  which  con- 
tribute to  the  understanding  of  the  conditions  of  the  present. 
Through  pertinent  audio-visual  material,  boys  and  girls  are 
challenged  to  discuss  and  interpret  the  significant  factors  in 
the  life  of  yesterday  and  today. 

School  experiences  and  life  experiences  will  be  so  closely 
related  that  they  will  be  as  one,  reflecting  the  ever-changing 
physical  and  economic-social  environment,  and  its  influence 
upon  attitude  and  action.  There  will  be  a  more  sympa- 
thetic understanding  of  the  relationship  of  one  human  being 

113 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
SOCIAL    STUDIES 


to  another,  of  one  nation  to  another.  An  example  of  this  is 
the  official  classroom  radio  project  of  the  National  Education 
Association  which  has  been  helpful  in  bringing  about  Pan- 
American  Unity  through  dramatic  presentations.  In  addition 
to  these  are  the  programs  which  have  come  from  the  "Work- 
shops" and  "Theaters  of  the  Air,"  vital  in  giving  children 
greater  interest  in  and  better  understanding  of  the  world  in 
which  they  live. 

Through  these  aids  there  will  develop  a  broadening  of  in- 
terests and  human  understanding,  a  realization  of  the  inter- 
relationship of  the  various  areas  in  the  curriculum  as  con- 
tributing factors  toward  international  information  which  will 
help  bring  about  world  brotherhood.  Soon  television  and  films 
will  be  combined  in  telecasts  which  will  add  their  potency  of 
combined  visual  and  auditory  appeal.  History  and  geography, 
vital  with  the  personalities  which  humanize  it,  will  become 
more  alive  with  color  and  drama. 


BETTER  MAP  TEACHING.  The  map  has  long  been  used 
by  teachers  of  the  social  studies  to  give  pupils  a  picture  of  this 
world  in  which,  and  on  which,  human  beings  live  and  work  as 
social  entities.  Maps  are  pictures  of  this  world— their  prime 
purpose  is  to  give  a  picture  of  nations  and  places.  As  pictures 
they  are  visual  aids  which  should  be  so  used  that  pupils  are 
made  aware  of  the  fact  that  the  social  studies  deal,  not  only 
with  man  and  his  tools  and  way  of  living,  but  also  with  the 
114 


PAINTERS 
SCULPTORS 


physical  environment  in  which  man  works  out  his  pattern  of 
hving. 

There  are  many  different  types  of  maps,  poHtical,  physical, 
population,  rainfall,  pictorial.  There  are  maps  which  are  crea- 
tions of  artistic  skill  and  craftsmanship,  and  others  which  are 
mere  combinations  of  lines  and  dots.  There  is  a  map  to  illus- 
trate almost  every  item  that  might  conceivably  be  dealt  with 
in  the  social  studies.  Teachers  should  endeavor  to  have  as 
many  different  types  of  maps  available  for  use  as  they  can 
secure.  These  maps,  used  as  aids  in  visualizing  this  world  in 
which  we  live,  will  help  pupils  to  understand  world  condi- 
tions, and  will  thus  help  to  vitalize  the  social  studies  lesson. 


PAINTERS  AND  SCULPTORS.  Painters  and  sculptors 
have  done  much  to  make  social  studies  vivid,  to  enable  the 
seeing  experience,  not  only  to  illustrate,  but  to  vitalize  the 
word  pictures  of  history.  Painters  of  history,  past  and  present, 
often  tell  their  stories  more  convincingly  than  writers  of 
history  do.  What  written  account  of  an  historical  personage 
can  convey  to  us  his  personality  and  character  as  swiftly  and 
convincingly  as  a  portrait  of  that  person  which  brings  out  the 
inner  quaHties  of  mind  and  spirit  as  well  as  the  physical  ap- 
pearance? 

Gilbert  Stuart's  portraits  of  George  Washington,  for  ex- 
ample, are  what  most  of  us  visualize  when  we  think  of  our 
first  great  leader.  Mark  Twain  announced  that  if  George 

115 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
SOCIAL    STUDIES 


MOTION    PICTURES 
RADIO 


Washington  should  come  back  to  earth  and  not  resemble 
Gilbert  Stuart's  portraits  of  him,  he  would  be  denounced  as  an 
impostor!  An  artist  who  pictures  an  historical  event  has  the  ad- 
vantage of  being  able  to  present  the  entire  episode  at  the  same 
time,  whereas  the  historian  must  unfold  it,  page  by  page. 

Those  painters  and  sculptors  who  not  only  tell  a  story  truth- 
fully and  dramatically,  but  with  all  the  beauty  of  their  vivid 
language,  best  make  history  live.  Thus,  the  seeing  experience 
not  merely  illustrates  but  vitalizes  the  word  pictures. 

With  this  in  mind,  teachers  who  select  visual  aids  to  enrich 
the  social  studies,  whether  they  choose  originals,  slides,  photo- 
graphs, book  illustrations,  will  soon  distinguish  between  those 
artists  of  historical  scenes  who  are  interested  only  in  telling  the 
story,  in  commemorating  patriotic  events  and  personages  as 
historical  records,  and  those  who  contribute  beauty  to  what 
they  have  to  say.  Let  words  make  our  historical  records  as  such, 
and  paintings  and  sculpture  supplement  them  as  vitally  and 
beautifully  as  possible,  for  art  is  a  cross-section  of  history. 


MOTION  PICTURES  AND  THE  RADIO.  As  for  mo- 
tion pictures,  authoritative  studies  have  proved  their  eflFective- 
ness  in  arousing  greater  interest  and  understanding  of  causes, 
results  and  relationships,  and  of  human  relations.  Most  would 

Stuart's  portrait  of  Washington  is  a  well-known  example  of  effec- 
tive visual  presentation  of  the  personality  and  character  of  an  his- 
torical personage. 

117 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
SOCIAL    STUDIES 

agree  that  radio  is  playing  an  important  role  in  interpreting, 
humanizing  and  vitalizing  social  studies,  in  bringing  to  the 
boys  and  girls  the  world  of  many  peoples  and  events.  With 
television,  the  usefulness  of  radio  as  an  audio-visual  aid  in 
curriculum  enrichment  will  be  greatly  increased,  reaching  as 
it  does  such  a  vast  audience  in  homes  and  schools. 


TREASURE  TRIPS.  Actual  school  journeys  or  Treasure 
Trips,  and  imaginary  ones  if  the  real  trip  is  impossible,  to 
period  rooms  with  their  furniture,  costimies,  arts  and  crafts, 
make  history  especially  meaningful  and  bring  to  life  the  people 
who  made  that  history.  For  in  considering  the  history  of  any 
country  and  period,  the  social  life  and  creative  expression  of 
the  people  play  an  important  part  in  presenting  human  experi- 
ences. Concrete  images  take  the  place  of  indefinite  ones,  and 
stimulate  a  better  understanding  of  environment. 

A  child  may  read  about  an  old  fireplace  and  see  a  book 
illustration  of  it,  but  he  will  not  gain  the  feeling  of  reality 
which  comes  from  standing  in  front  of  a  big,  three-dimensional 
fireplace  in  a  real  room  with  its  heavy-beamed,  low  ceiling,  a 
room  which  actually  came  from  a  Pilgrim  home.  The  brass 
warming-pan  reflecting  on  its  polished  surface  each  passing 
light,  the  Betty-lamp,  pewter  dishes,  desk-boxes  which  held 
the  Pilgrim  Bibles,  andirons,  colorful  cushions,  combine  utility 
and  beauty  and  reveal  much  of  the  early  American  way  of 
living.  Any  boy  or  girl  can  people  these  rooms  with  Pilgrim 
118 


TREASURE 
TRIPS 


men,  women  and  children  in  their  simple  homespun  costumes, 
living  frugally  on  a  new,  untried  shore. 

How  quickly  and  vividly  such  a  visit  stimulates  observa- 
tion and  thought,  as  the  young  discoverers  follow  clues,  solve 
problems  and  find  treasures!  The  actual  treasures,  realia,  vital- 
ize history  and  geography,  humanize  and  socialize  them.  In 
connection  with  these  trips,  stereopticon  and  kodachrome 
slides  carefullv  selected  and  related  add  to  the  vividness  of 
the  experience. 

The  Colonial  rooms  in  the  American  Wing  of  the  Metro- 


A  realistic  miniature  group  by  Dwight  Franklin  brings  to  life  the 
history-book  presentation  of  Washington's  first  inauguration. 


119 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
SOCIAL    STUDIES 


politan  Museum  of  Art  transport  boys  and  girls  who  are  study- 
ing that  period  in  history,  to  the  actual  time  of  George  Wash- 
ington and  other  patriots.  The  ballroom  from  a  tavern  in 
Virginia  where  they  danced  as  fiddlers  in  the  balcony  played 
the  slow  and  stately  music  of  the  minuet,  re-creates  that  scene. 
A  stereopticon  slide  or  photograph  of  Howard  Pyle's  simple 
but  dramatic  drawing  of  General  Washington  leading  his  old 
mother  through  the  doorway  of  the  ballroom  as  Colonial  and 
French  oflBcers  and  their  ladies  bow  respectfully  may  be  very 
eflFective.  Slides,  photographs  and  color  prints  of  portraits  of 
Washington  by  early  American  painters  will  also  help  pro- 
duce the  vividness  of  the  experience. 

The  mahogany  furniture  of  that  period,  inspired  by  the 
famous  furniture-makers  of  the  mother  country,  shows  the 
change  from  the  straight  lines  of  the  sturdy  Pilgrim  furniture 
to  the  curved  lines,  more  beautiful  wood,  more  decoration, 
greater  grace  and  delicacy  of  the  following  century.  Paul 
Revere  silverware,  simple^  beautiful  in  form,  proportion,  light 
and  shadow,  and  sparing  of  ornament,  speaks  well  for  the 
craftsmen's  art  in  combining  utility  and  beauty.  Through  this 
reality  of  experience  the  people  of  Colonial  days  step  from 
the  pages  of  the  history  book,  alive  and  human,  and  take  their 
places  in  their  own  environment. 

In  districts  where  there  are  no  museums  or  historical  houses 
with  their  period  rooms,  there  should  be  period  furniture  and 
costumes  in  some  of  the  homes.  With  pupil  and  parent  help, 
Pilgrim,  Colonial  and  Nineteenth  century  settings  may  be 
120 


TREASURE 
TRIPS 


laid  in  the  school  library  or  classroom,  and  become  effective 
as  the  background  for  an  original  play  or  plays  in  which  his- 
torical characters  "come  to  life". 

Audio-visual  aids— book  illustrations,  photographs,  slides, 
filmstrips,  dioramas,  and  films— are  indispensable.  Schools 
which  have  no  projectors  for  slides,  filmstrips,  or  films,  will 
be  able  to  borrow  photographs,  book  illustrations  and  color 
plates  from  the  geographic  and  travel  magazines  in  the 
nearest  library  to  supplement  textbook  and  supplementary 
reading  illustrations.  Schools  with  projectors  will  be  able  to 
procure  slides  or  films,  or  a  combination,  from  educational 
sources  ( See  chapter  XVI ) . 

"National  understanding"  will  take  on  real  meaning  when, 
through  audio-visual  aids,  children  of  our  cities  become  ac- 
quainted with  western  cattle  ranches  and  wheat  farms,  with 
mining  districts  and  southern  cottonfields;  when  children  of 
farming,  cattle  and  mining  regions  know  more  about  life  in 
Boston,  New  York,  Washington,  Chicago,  San  Francisco. 

By  means  of  this  audio- visual  enrichment,  social  studies  pre- 
sent to  children  a  study  of  life,  an  understanding  of  the  social 
and  economic  problems  which  contribute  to  conditions  of  the 
past  and  the  present.  Through  these  audio-visual  aids  social 
studies  foster  a  keener  realization  of  the  relation  of  one  human 
being  to  another,  of  one  nation  to  another. 


121 


EDUCATORS  REALIZE  more  than  ever  before  that  the 
vigorous  method  of  teaching  social  studies  through  audio- 
visual materials  is  needed  in  training  for  democracy,  and  for 
an  understanding  of  the  interdependence  of  all  peoples. 

These  aids  may  emphasize  and  interpret  the  common  cul- 
tural languages  among  all  nations— painting,  sculpture,  archi- 
tecture, arts  and  crafts,  music,  the  dance,  and  dramatics.  Arts 
and  crafts  throughout  the  ages  reveal  the  application  of  art 
to  practical  life  and  help  interpret  human  desires  and  needs. 
They  are  the  very  essence  of  the  people  who  produce  them. 
When  they  are  presented  in  their  proper  settings  through 
audio-visual  materials,  they  give  a  better  understanding  of 
the  influence  of  environment. 

The  story  of  furniture,  for  example,  is  an  important  part  of 
the  history  of  the  manners  and  customs  of  different  peoples. 
Delicate  lace,  rich  enamels,  embroidery,  pottery,  glassware- 
all  are  arts  widely  spread  throughout  the  whole  human  race 
revealing  the  social  and  economic  life,  the  culture  of  the  coun- 
tries from  which  they  come,  the  creative  "heart"  expression 
of  the  people  through  the  craftsmen  who  combine  utility  and 
beauty. 

In  the  same  way  music,  the  dance,  and  dramatics  have 
grown  up  with  the  people  of  every  land,  express  the  feelings 
of  their  creators  and  arouse  like  emotions  in  the  hearts  of  those 
who  hear  and  see  them.  These  common  cultural  languages 
demonstrate  the  similar  interests,  desires  and  goals  of  all  peo- 

123 


UNDERSTANDING 
WORLD    CULTURE 

pies,  the  realization  that  we  are  all  human  beings  belonging 
to  one  world,  hoping  for  a  lasting  peace  through  world  cul- 
ture, justice,  tolerance,  the  Brotherhood  of  Man. 

Educators  all  over  the  world  understand  this  and  are  mak- 
ing a  plea  for  world  culture.  A  realization  through  vital, 
human,  sensory  learning  of  the  cultural  heritage  and  creative 
contributions  of  the  nations  of  the  world  will  help  boys  and 
girls  interpret  and  satisfy  human  desires  and  needs.  More  than 
that,  it  will  help  shape  conduct.  Pride  in  the  achievements  of 
the  past  will  be  fostered,  intercultural  understanding  stimu- 
lated, and  creative  responses  encouraged  in  thought  and 
action. 

Would  not  programs  like  the  following,  enriched  by  talks, 
stories,  slides— both  in  black  and  white  and  in  color— films, 
color-prints,  and  dioramas,  help  bring  about  this  realization 
of  world  culture? 


124 


The  common  language  of  art  increases  understanding  between 
races  and  nations.  Here  an  Indian  craftsman  enthralls  a  young 
audience  with  ceremonial  sand  designs. 

UNDERSTANDING  AMONG  NATIONS 
THROUGH  THE  COMMON  LANGUAGE 
OF    ART,    MUSIC    AND    THE     DANCE 

1.  UNDERSTANDING     AMONG     NATIONS     THROUGH     THEIR 

HANDICRAFTS.  Illustrated  by  slides,  many  of  them  in  color, 
and  a  film,  Voices  in  the  Air,  showing  the  closeness  of  nations 
today. 

2.  DANCES  OF  MANY  LANDS.  Story  of  the  dancc,  illustrated 
by  slides  from  world  masterpieces  and  film.  On  With  the 
Dance,  showing  dances  of  various  countries.  Dance  demon- 
strations by  the  pupils. 

125 


UNDERSTANDING 
WORLD    CULTURE 

3.  STORIES  OF  GREAT  BUILDERS.  Stoiy  of  architecture,  illus- 
trated by  slides.  Film,  Historic  Cities  of  India,  stressing  the 
Taj  Mahal.  Discussion  by  the  pupils. 

4.  FAMOUS  BUILDINGS  OF  THE  WORLD  bascd  ou  program  of 
previous  week.  Identification  and  discussion  of  slides  by  the 
pupils.  Film,  Churches  and  Cathedrals. 

5.  HANDICRAFT  STORIES  illustrated  by  slides  and  examples 
of  weaving,  enamel,  jewelry,  etc.,  brought  in  by  the  pupils. 

6.  MUSIC  AND  MUSIC  STORIES.  Victrola  records  in  story  fol- 
lowed by  film.  An  Optical  Poem  ( in  color ) ,  showing  the  close 
correlation  of  color  and  music. 

7.  HIGHWAY  OF  FRIENDSHIP.  Story  of  the  Inter-American 
Highway,  illustrated  by  sHdes,  film  and  diorama. 

8.  CRAFTSMEN  OF  MEXICO.  Story,  kodachromc  film,  dio- 
rama, realia. 

9.  LIVING  THE  PICTURES.  Slidcs,  black  and  white  and  color, 
of  world  paintings,  sculptures,  etc.  Impromptu  tableaux  by 
the  pupils  and  quick  sketches  from  memory. 

10.  HOW  TO  PAINT  THE  CHINESE  WAY.  Story,  slidcs,  dio- 
rama, and  kodachrome  film.  Discussion  by  the  pupils  and  the 
teacher  of  likenesses  and  differences  of  paintings  of  the  East 
and  West.  Poems  by  children,  inspired  by  pictures. 

126 


EXAMPLE    OF 
SCHEDULE 

11.  EARLY  AMERICAN  GLASS.  The  story  of  "Baron"  Stiegel, 
illustrated  by  slides  and  followed  by  two  films :  The  Baron  and 
The  Rose  and  Recording  Modern  Sciences,  comparing  the  old 
and  the  new. 

12.  A  CITY  OF  MANY  NATIONS.  Slides  of  Old  New  York  and 
New  York  of  Today.  Recognition  and  discussion  by  the  pupils, 
followed  by  film,  Up  and  Down  New  York. 

13.  LIBERTY  IN  AMERICA.  Story  of  Washington,  Jcffcrson 
and  Monroe.  Slides  of  the  three  leaders  and  their  beautiful 
homes.  Film,  in  color,  of  their  homes.  Discussion  of  the 
"Birth  of  our  Democracy  and  Hopes  for  the  Future." 

14.  COLOR  PRINTS  AND  THEIR  STORIES.  Exhibition  of  paint- 
ings by  artists  of  many  lands,  followed  by  choice  and  discus- 
sion by  the  pupils. 

15.  MAPS  OF  MANY  KINDS— OLD  AND  NEW.  Film,  Airplane 
CJianges  Our  World  Map.  Exhibition  of  maps.  Discussion  of 
"Our  Changing  World." 

16.  ART  IS  MANY-SIDED.  Talk  with  slidcs:  ivories,  enamels, 
furniture,  costume,  ironwork,  etc.  Discussion  by  the  pupils. 

17.  ORIGINAL  WORK  BY  CHILDREN.  Talk  by  the  pupils,  fol- 
lowed by  slides  of  painting,  sculpture,  arts  and  crafts. 

18.  PICTURES  MADE  ON  WOOD  BLOCKS  AND  METAL  PLATES. 

Slides  and  film.  How  to  Make  an  Etching. 

127 


UNDERSTANDING 
WORLD    CULTURE 

19.  ARTISTIC  ADVERTISING— EAST  AND  WEST.  Travel  and 
commercial  posters.  Place  of  commercial  art  in  world  of  today. 
Discussion  by  children,  followed  by  posters  made  by  the 
pupils. 

20.  BEAUTY  IN  NATURE  AS  SEEN  AND  EXPRESSED  BY  ART- 
ISTS. Talk,  illustrated  by  sHdes  and  followed  by  film.  Nature 
Speaks. 

In  each  program,*  planned  to  cover  one  week,  the  seven-to- 
eleven-year-old  groups  reached.  There  are  discussions  and 
creative  contributions  by  the  pupils  and  integration  with  the 
work  in  the  classrooms,  f 

International  workshops  or  exhibits  in  our  schools  correlate 
with  and  vitaHze  the  audio- visual  programs  which  present  and 
interpret  the  cultural  contributions  of  nations.  "Treasures"  no 
matter  how  small,  which  boys  and  girls  of  different  nationali- 

*  Slides  and  color  prints  from  The  Metropolitan  Museum  of  Art  and  The 
American  Museum  of  Natural  History.  Films  and  dioramas  from  the  latter 
Museum  and  films  from  The  International  Theatrical  and  Television  Co.,  Inc. 
and  The  Harmon  Foundation.  Similar  slides,  films  and  prints  may  be  procured 
from  educational  and  commercial  centers  in  various  parts  of  the  country.  See 
Chapter  XVI-"Where  to  Obtain  Help." 

f  These  Audio- Visual  Enrichment  Programs,  and  their  integration  with  the 
Educational  Department  of  the  College,  were  sponsored  by  Dr.  Florence 
Brumbaugh,  Principal  of  the  Hunter  College  Elementary  School,  Professor 
Philip  R.  V.  Curoe,  Chairman  of  the  College  Department  of  Education,  and 
Dr.  Frank  T.  W^ilson,  Coordinator.  The  programs  for  1946,  Fall,  and  1947, 
Spring,  continued  "World  Understanding"  through  visits  to  many  countries 
of  the  world.  They  were  sponsored  by  the  acting  Principal,  Mary  M.  Burgess, 
and  were  conducted  by  Anna  Curtis  Chandler,  Chairman  of  Audio- Visual 
Enrichment. 

128 


EXAMPLE    OF 
SCHEDULE 

ties  bring  from  home,  stimulate  pride  in  the  artistic  achieve- 
ments of  all  the  nations,  east  and  west,  lead  to  a  better  inter- 
cultural  understanding  and  encourage  their  own  aesthetic 
responses  and  desires  to  create  in  poems,  songs,  crayon, 
chalk,  paint,  clay  and  dioramas.  Emphasis  upon  our  cultural 
education,  the  common  cultural  languages,  through  these 
audio-visual  aids  which  eliminate  time  and  space,  is  a  sure 
foundation  for  world  understanding,  for  universal  brother- 
hood. 

Real  understanding  of  other  peoples  is  obtained  only  when 
we  gain  some  knowledge  of  how  they  live,  what  they  eat,  what 
they  wear,  what  they  do  and  what  they  are  thinking  about. 
When  you  see  things  from  neighboring  countries  and  meet 
people  whose  heritage  is  just  a  Httle  different  from  your  own, 
you  soon  begin  to  notice  similarities  between  their  ways  and 
yours.  Progi'ams  for  world  understanding  should  strive  to  em- 
phasize similarities,  instead  of  continually  stressing  differences 
between  peoples  of  the  world. 


129 


The  artistic  skill  of  ancient  Aztec  sculptors  is  depicted  in  this  Tem- 
ple of  Quetzalcoatl,  Mexican  deity  of  culture  and  civilization. 


In  1945  and  1946,  at  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  His- 
tory, as  part  of  the  program  for  schools  visiting  the  museum, 
there  w^as  a  series  of  special  "Weeks."  These  weeks  w^ere  de- 
voted to  programs  designed  to  bring  a  picture  of  the  life  of 
different  peoples  of  the  w^orld  to  pupils  in  the  New^  York  City 
schools.  There  vv^as  a  "Mexican  Week"  in  February,  1945;  a 
"South  American  Week"  in  April,  1945;  and  an  "Oriental 
Week"  in  October,  1945.  In  each  program,  emphasis  was 
placed  on  the  clothing,  food,  arts  and  crafts  of  the  people  of 
130 


EXAMPLES    OF 
PROGRAMS 

the  area.  As  far  as  possible,  living  models  took  part  in  the  pro- 
gram. Classes,  visiting  the  museum  for  these  programs,  were 
made  to  feel  that  they  were  seeing  the  costumes  and  foods  and 
craft- work  of  people  who  were  friends  and  neighbors.  The  fol- 
lowing are  brief  descriptions  of  the  programs  as  carriisd  out 
at  the  museum.  Programs  of  this  type  might  well  be  adapted 
and  carried  out  as  part  of  a  term  project  by  one  class,  or  by  an 
entire  school. 

I.MEXICAN   WEEK 

FOOD.  A  demonstration  by  a  Mexican  woman  of  the  way  to 
make  tortillas.  Exhibit  of  stone  metate  for  grinding  of  corn, 
bags  of  Mexican  corn  meal,  tropical  fruits  and  vegetables. 
(This  demonstration  might  be  given  by  students  in  home 
economics. ) 

CLOTHING.  Museum  staff  members,  dressed  in  native  Mexi- 
can costumes,  presided  at  the  various  exhibits. 

ARTS  AND  CRAFTS.  A  muscum  Staff  member,  in  Mexican  cos- 
tume, engaged  in  actual  work  on  silver  bowls  and  jewelry. 
Exhibit  of  typical  jade  and  silver  jewelry  from  Taxco  and 
Mexico  City.  Students  from  a  class  in  pottery-making  at  New 
York  University's  division  of  industrial  and  vocational  arts 
demonstrated  how  to  use  a  potter's  wheel.  Specimens  of  pot- 
tery from  Tlaquepaque,  Oaxaca  and  Puebla  were  displayed. 
( These  demonstrations  might  be  given  by  students  in  the  arts 
and  crafts,  vocational  and  manual  training  classes. ) 

131 


UNDERSTANDING 
WORLD    CULTURE 

MUSIC  AND  DANCE.  A  Mcxican  boy  and  girl  dressed  in  the 
colonial  costumes  of  the  particular  dances,  performed  the  ja- 
rabe  and  the  jarango,  dances  dear  to  the  hearts  of  all  Mexicans. 

MOTION  PICTURES.  All  studcnts  visiting  the  museum  for  this 
special  program  saw  the  films  "Arts  and  Crafts  of  Old  Mexico," 
"Treasure  Trove  of  Jade"  and  "Sky  Dancers  of  Papantla." 

PLANETARIUM.  As  part  of  the  program  all  students  went  to 
the  Hayden  Planetarium  where  they  were  shown  the  stars  they 
might  expect  to  see  if  they  lived  in  Mexico.  (This  part  of  the 
program  might  be  carried  out  by  means  of  star  charts,  lantern 
slides  and  pictorial  demonstrations  on  the  blackboard  or  with 
diagrams. ) 

2.SOUTH  AND  CENTRAL  AMERICAN  WEEK 
FOOD.  A  demonstration  of  the  way  Bolivians  cook  kinoa,  the 
native  cereal  grain  of  that  country.  Exhibit  of  native  fruits  and 
vegetables  obtainable  in  the  local  market. 

CLOTHING.  Pupils  from  two  elementary  schools  donned  native 
costumes  from  Guatemala  and  presented  a  "living"  fashion 
show  for  all  the  visiting  children.  The  experience  of  wearing 
costumes  from  another  country  gave  their  wearers  an  appreci- 
ation for  the  styles  and  materials  worn  by  a  group  of  people 
hitherto  little  known  to  them. 

ARTS  AND  CRAFTS.  Across  from  this  fashion  show  a  group  of 
silent  fi*gures  kept  watch.  Departing  slightly  from  the  all  "hv- 
132 


EXAMPLES    OF 
PROGRAMS 


ing"  exhibits,  the  museum  borrowed  from  one  of  New  York's 
large  department  stores  a  group  which  had  formed  a  window 
display.  The  scene  depicted  a  Peruvian  market,  with  manni- 
kins,  in  native  costumes,  gathered  together  in  the  market  place 
as  the  natives  do  in  that  country.  The  costumes  were  brought 
back  by  Carolyn  Schnurer,  a  New  York  designer,  from  a  trip 
to  South  America  during  a  search  for  inspiration  for  new  de- 


Peruvians  in  native  costumes  participate  in  a  colorful  traditional 
festival. 


133 


UNDERSTANDING 
WORLD    CULTURE 


signs  in  dresses  and  sportswear.  Many  a  youthful  student  from 
the  city's  art  classes  stood  before  this  group  and  made  sketch 
after  sketch  adapting  the  odd-looking  jackets  and  blouses  to 
the  tastes  of  modem  young  Miss  America. 

MOTION  PICTURES;  MUSIC  AND  DANCE.  After  Seeing  Several 
films  depicting  life  in  South  America,  including  one  program 
of  Julien  Bryan's  splendid  films  on  Bolivia  and  Uruguay,  the 
visit  to  South  America  concluded  with  a  program  of  Bolivian 
dances  by  a  native  Bolivian. 

3.0RIENTAL  WEEK 

FOOD.  A  young  Chinese  woman  member  of  the  museum's  edu- 
cational staff  demonstrated  how  to  prepare  a  typical  Chinese 
dish  of  vegetables  and  pork  and  rice. 

CLOTHING  AND  HOMES.  An  exhibit  of  sketches  by  two  well- 
known  artists  showed  the  life  and  peoples  of  the  Philippines, 
Sumatra,  Java,  Borneo  and  Japan.  Students  were  able  to  visu- 
alize clearly  the  different  types  of  homes  in  that  section  of  the 
world  and  the  way  people  live  and  dress. 

ARTS  AND  CRAFTS.  A  demonstration  in  the  use  of  the  potter's 
wheel.  Exhibit  of  Chinese  pottery.  The  highlight  of  this  pro- 
gram was  the  exhibit  of  Chinese,  Balinese  and  Javanese  pup- 
pets and  a  puppet  show.  Behind  a  shadow  screen,  like  those 
set  up  in  the  towns  of  Java  and  Bali,  danced  beautifully  carved 
shadow  puppets  so  dear  to  these  peoples.  Princes  and  prin- 
134 


EXAMPLES    OF 
PROGRAMS 

cesses,  dragons,  fighting  cocks,  heroes  and  villains  all  moved 
across  the  screen  to  the  great  delight  of  eagerly  watching 
young  New  Yorkers.  (Pupils  might  well  make  their  own  pup- 
pets for  a  demonstration  of  this  type. ) 

MOTION  PICTURES.  "Charm  and  Costume"  depicted  cos- 
tumes of  China,  and  excerpts  from  films  dealt  with  life  in  the 
various  islands  of  the  Pacific. 

All  three  programs  were  staged  for  a  period  of  a  week  in 
the  foyer  hall  of  the  museum  which  accommodated  large 
groups  of  children  at  one  time.  Exhibits,  similar  to  those  de- 
scribed, might  be  set  up  in  cases  in  school  corridors  or  in  the 
school  library.  Other  parts  of  the  programs  such  as  dances  or 
puppet-shows  might  be  given  in  classrooms  or  in  the  audi- 
torium. The  cooking  demonstrations  might  be  given  either  in 
the  special  home  economics  room  or  as  part  of  an  assembly 
program.  The  important  point  to  keep  in  mind  is  that  a  pro- 
gram of  this  type,  concentrating  on  the  life  and  culture  of 
some  neighbor  in  another  part  of  the  world,  brings  that  neigh- 
bor closer  to  the  pupils  of  your  class. 


135 


XI.  Enrichment  oi  Lan^ua^e  Arts 
Example  ol  Program 


^: 


^^' 


T-  ,'^' 


« 


^.^ 


»'/ 


V 


■\ 


r 


^^^- 


ii*V" 


«s*»      ? 


.#] 


r-^i 


i 


3t 


LITERATURE,  AN  IMPORTANT  part  of  the  curricu- 
lum area  of  language  arts,  is  humanized  and  vitalized  by 
audio-visual  enrichment.  In  literature,  as  in  social  studies, 
there  is  no  place  today  for  a  school  program  in  which  the  main 
aims  and  objectives  are  techniques,  skills  and  the  mere  storing 
away  of  facts.  Consideration  is  given,  instead,  to  the  student's 
immediate  personal  enjoyment  and  to  the  lasting  enrichment 
of  his  life.  There  must  be  a  combination  of  the  student's  appre- 
ciation of  the  best  in  literature,  the  functional  application  of 
techniques  and  skills,  a  combination  of  the  dynamic  experi- 
ences of  active  life  with  the  intellectual  activities  which  for- 
merly were  of  the  first  concern. 

Today  the  classroom  is  a  workshop,  enabling  boys  and  girls 
to  gain  intimate  knowledge  through  personal,  active  partici- 
pation in  varied,  everyday,  related  experiences— both  direct 
and  indirect.  These  develop  in  the  student  the  power  of  adjust- 
ment necessary  to  meet  the  ever-changing  life-experiences  of 
today,  and  the  power  of  self-guidance,  self -learning,  which  is 
the  goal  of  all  learning.  This  is  vital  for  successful  living,  espe- 
cially in  these  days  of  swiftly  changing  social,  economic  and 
industrial  patterns. 

Again,  there  is  no  place  today  for  a  program  of  language  arts 
which  is  concerned  wholly  with  a  "mass  of  facts,"  and  a 
"dissection"  of  isolated  masterpieces.  Literature,  like  social 
studies,  is  a  human  document  which  should  be  freely,  infor- 

137 


ENRICHMENT  OF 
LANGUAGE  ARTS 


mally,  and  happily  discussed,  enjoyed,  and  related  to  individ- 
ual and  group  experiences  in  the  school  and  outside.  Through 
audio-visual  enrichment,  the  student  is  given  varied  and 
meaningful  experiences  and  adventures  in  hearing,  seeing  and 
feeling  in  fields  of  human  activity  and  accomplishment.  He 
relives  past  experiences  and  enjoys  new  ones  through  the  sym- 
pathetic sharing  of  the  experiences  of  characters  in  the  stories 
made  vivid  and  real  through  audio-visual  aids. 

This  emphasis  upon  individual  needs  and  choices,  this  per- 
sonal enjoyment,  does  not  mean  that  the  backgrounds  of  prose 
and  poetry  should  be  neglected.  It  does  mean,  however,  that 
they  should  be  "introductory"  to  the  enjoyment  of  the  literary 
selection  itself.  Often  such  backgrounds  are  quite  necessary  to 
an  understanding  and  appreciation  of  the  literature  they  intro- 
duce, and  the  seeing  and  hearing  aids  play  an  important  role 
in  their  presentation. 

Audio-visual  enrichment  of  the  Language  Arts  program 
stimulates  the  imagination  and  quickens  the  emotions  through 
a  deeper  appreciation  of  stories  and  their  characters,  and  a 
keener  understanding  of  dramatic  episodes  which  the  students 
"live"  vicariously.  The  student's  own  experiences  are  broad- 
ened through  these  seeing  and  hearing  experiences,  and  there 
is  a  sympathetic  sharing  of  the  many  experiences  presented 
through  this  audio-visual  appeal.  Book  illustrations  have  long 
been  effective  in  accomplishing  this,  and  photographs,  slides, 
filmstrips,  radio  and  films  are  more  so.  There  is  a  better  inte- 
gration of  the  student's  own  personality  by  orienting  him  to 
138 


RADIO 
DRAMATICS 

different  life  situations  through  vivid  audio-visual  portrayal. 
Thus  there  is  fostered  in  the  student  a  greater  power  to  think, 
to  feel,  and  to  accomplish. 

Personalities  are  brought  to  life  through  this  enrichment, 
and  life-situations  are  vitalized.  A  better  understanding  of 
story  or  play,  its  setting  and  the  personages  in  it,  all  of  which 
without  these  aids  may  be  quite  outside  the  student's  imme- 
diate environment,  produces  a  far  greater  feeling  of  concrete- 
ness  and  reality.  These  concrete  aids  also  help  boys  and  girls 
compare  and  judge  related  experiences,  and  receive  new  ones. 

THE  RADIO.  Through  the  radio  which  may  be  found  in 
most  homes  and  schools,  many  share  the  experiences  which  are 
so  vividly  portrayed.  The  imagination  of  the  listener  creates 
pictures  in  keeping  with  the  audio  appeal.  There  is,  also,  a 
strong  appeal  to  the  emotions.  The  dramatized  story  is  vital- 
ized, the  characters  take  on  form  and  personality,  as  the  lis- 
tener identifies  himself  with  one  of  them  and  with  the  action 
of  the  plot.  The  dramatizations  in  the  educational  programs  of 
our  broadcasting  companies  should  be  planned  to  increase 
the  interest  of  boys  and  girls  in  leisure  time  reading.  Television 
will  greatly  increase  this  interest.  Broadcasts  of  the  School  of 
the  Air,  for  example,  are  planned  to  supplement  classroom 
work  by  bringing  to  the  class  important  world  events,  people, 
and  excellent  dramatic  and  musical  talent.  Thus  they  enlarge 
the  horizons  of  boys  and  girls  and  encourage  them  in  volun- 
tary reading. 

139 


ENRICHMENT  OF 
LANGUAGE  ARTS 


The  modern  medium  of  television  aids  in  bringing  to  life  famous 
persons  in  history  and  literature. 

140 


COMBINATIONS 
OF    AIDS 

MOTION  PICTURES,  DRAMATICS.  The  motion  pic- 
ture is  as  effective  in  making  literary  personages  live  as  it  is  in 
bringing  to  life  famous  persons  in  history.  Many  times  the 
motion  picture  is  the  most  potent  of  all  the  audio-visual  aids 
in  bringing  this  about,  when  the  story  is  not  distorted  as  it 
sometimes  is  for  box-office  appeal.  The  dramatization  of 
literary  subjects  is  valuable  because  of  continuity  in  vivid 
unfolding  of  plot,  convincingly  human  characters,  examples 
of  voice  and  diction,  and  enrichment  of  vocabulary.  Drama- 
tizations of  some  of  the  stories  recommended  in  the  school 
curriculum  are  available  in  the  16  mm.  films.  The  fee  for  their 
use  is  prohibitive  for  many  smaller  schools  but  parent  commit- 
tees are  often  organized  to  take  care  of  that  problem.  Some 
of  the  films  deal  with  stories  by  Shakespeare,  Dickens,  Kip- 
ling, Longfellow,  Mark  Twain  and  Washington  Irving. 

SELECTION  AND  COMBINATION  OF  AIDS. 
There  are  other  situations  when  the  combination  of  the 
motion  picture  with  carefully  selected  stereopticon  or  koda- 
chrome  slides,  followed  by  a  Treasure  Trip,  is  what  the  teacher 
feels  is  required  to  make  story,  book,  or  play  yield  to  boys  and 
girls  its  full  meaning.  The  teacher  must  decide  which  form  of 
audio-visual  material,  or  which  combination,  is  most  effective. 
Personal  selection  is  important,  for  only  the  teacher  who 
is  familiar  with  the  material  to  be  presented,  and  the  educa- 
tional aims  to  be  accomplished,  can  effectively  select  which 
aids  shall  be  used. 

141 


A  Shakespearean  drama  unfolds  on  an  Elizabethan  stage. 


TO   SHAKESPEARE'S   PLAY   WITH 
QUEEN  BESS  AND  HER  COURTIERS 

This  program  has  an  introduction  to  be  illustrated  with 
stereopticon  slides  which  may  be  borrowed  from  the  school 
service  lending  collections  of  museums,  from  collections  made 
by  the  boards  of  education  of  various  cities  and  towns,  and 
from  libraries  in  state  and  city  institutions.  They  may  be  rented 
from  educational  and  commercial  companies. 

If  slides  are  not  available,  and  the  school  has  an  opaque  pro- 
jector, book  illustrations,  photographs,  and  postcards  illustra- 
142 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 

tive  of  the  period  and  story  may  be  used  most  effectively. 

If  neither  sHde  *  nor  opaque  projector  is  available,  an  ex- 
hibition of  mounted  photographs  and  postcards,  made  avail- 
able to  classrooms  before  the  program,  will  be  helpful. 

These  illustrations  make  the  introduction  vivid,  with  the 
combination  of  visual  and  auditory  appeal,  and  often  that  of 
touch  when  the  illustrations  seem  to  be  three-dimensional. 

The  story  should  be  told  rather  than  read,  when  possible, 
and  presented  vividly  in  costume  if  a  suitable  costume  can  be 
procured.  The  parts  should  be  portrayed  with  human  and 
dramatic  appeal. 

Any  possible  Treasure  Trip  to  see  models,  paintings,  armor, 
tapestries  of  that  period,  doubles  the  effectiveness  of  the 
presentation. 

INTRODUCTION  "LEADING  INTO"  THE  STORY 

SLIDE- 

Architecture,   English,   Renaissance.   London  before  the 
Great  Fire— Old  London  Bridge  Model  ( London  Museum ) 

The  sixteenth  century.  Queen  Elizabeth's  century,  was  one 
of  greatness.  In  some  ways,  it  was  the  most  significant  in 
English  history,  and  has  influenced  the  world.  It  marked  the 
change  from  the  Middle  Ages  to  the  modern  world.  Compe- 
tition entered  work  and  the  individual  stepped  from  the 
crowd.  England  was  supreme.  Queen  Elizabeth's  brave  Sea 

*  The  stereopticon  slides  listed  here  are  from  the  Lending  Collections,  Metro- 
politan Museum  of  Art. 

143 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
LANGUAGE    ARTS 

Kings  had  most  effectively  "singed  King  Philip's  beard."  King 
Philip  of  Spain  found  that  he  could  no  longer  boast  that  he 
was  Master  of  the  Seas.  Queen  Elizabeth's  Sea  Kings— Sir 
Francis  Drake,  Sir  Walter  Raleigh,  Sir  John  Hawkins,  had 
made  her  Queen  of  the  Seas.  The  great  Spanish  Armada,  which 
King  Philip  had  boasted  was  invincible,  was  conquered.  Eng- 
land ruled  supreme  on  both  land  and  sea. 

SLIDE- 

Frints,  Engravings,  Zundt.  Portrait  of  Sir  Francis  Drake 
( London,  British  Museum ) 

SLIDE- 

Frints,  Engravings,  Leu.  Portrait  of  Sir  Walter  Raleigh 
(London,  British  Museum) 

SLIDE- 

Frints,  Engravings,  Fine,  J.  S.  Spanish  Armada 

It  was  an  age  of  great  men,  not  only  brave  sailors,  soldiers, 
and  gallant  courtiers,  but  fine  writers,  poets,  actors,  and  artists. 

SXIDE- 

Architecture,  English,  Renaissance.  Fenshurst  Castle 

Mingled  with  the  points  of  gables  and  the  perpendicular 
lines  of  tall  chimneys  reminiscent  of  the  Middle  Ages,  were 

SLIDE- 

Manners  and  Customs,  Domestic,  English,  XVI  Century. 
Elizabethan  Staircase 
144 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 


the  square-headed  windows  and  doorways  of  the  new  style  in 
architecture.  Classic  designs,  borrowed  from  the  Greeks  and 
the  Romans,  were  introduced  into  the  wood-carving.  Slender 
columns  and  patterned  capitals,  scroll  and  leaf  designs  which 
had  come  in  with  the  new  style  from  Italy,  the  Renaissance, 
were  in  use.  There  was  a  riot  of  carving  done  with  exquisite 
skill. 


Moreton  Old  Hall— a  surviving  example  of  English  Renaissance 
architecture. 


'■'  ,_J5!^'«<i'igS8«5i 


''mnmy'^Mm 


^rn^rnm 


145 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
LANGUAGE    ARTS 

The  great  hall,  formerly  with  a  roof  of  its  own,  was  incor- 
porated as  a  part  of  the  house  which  was  often  shaped  like  the 
capital  letter  E  in  honor  of  Elizabeth,  with  many  rooms  built 
around  two  inner  courts. 

SLIDE- 

Architecture,  English,  Renaissance.  Pitchford  Hall,  Ex- 
terior 

SLIDE- 

Manners  and  Customs,  Domestic,  English,  XVI  Century. 
An  Elizabethan  Family  in  Front  of  Their  House 

The  windows,  symmetrically  arranged,  made  it  difficult  in 
the  estimation  of  some  of  the  folk  of  the  time— Lord  Bacon 
among  them— to  keep  away  from  the  drafts  or  the  sun!  Oriel 
windows  were  introduced,  like  bow  windows,  built  out  from 
the  wall  and  resting  on  brackets. 

SLIDE- 

Architecture,  English,  Renaissance.  Hardwick  Hall,  Inte- 
rior, Staircase 

Costumes  reflected  the  changes  in  architecture,  the  pointed 
forms  giving  way  to  rounded,  though  some  of  the  old  pointed 
style  was  still  used.  The  circular  stone  staircases  changed  to 
the  beautifully  carved  wooden  ones  which  were  more  accom- 
modating to  the  long,  wide,  stiff  skirts,  the  ungainly  farthin- 
gales! Bodices  were  stiff  and  pointed,  embroidered  with  jewels. 


146 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 

The  ruffs,  of  Spanish  origin,  grew  larger  and  stiffer,  until 
finally  large,  fan-like  collars  developed. 

SLIDE- 

Painting,  Geeraerts,  M.  Portrait  of  Elizabeth,  Hardwick  Hall 

The  armor  of  the  time  followed  the  pointed  doublet,  and  the 
engraved  designs  imitated  the  gold  and  silver  braid  which 
decorated  the  doublets. 

SLIDE- 

Arms— Armor,  English,  XVI  Century  Suit  of  Armor  which 
belonged  to  Sir  James  Scudaniore,  Gentleman,  usher  at  the 
Court  of  Queen  Elizabeth  (New  York  City,  Metropolitan 
Museum  of  Art ) 

The  foremost  man  of  the  time  was  one  William  Shakespeare, 
the  greatest  writer  of  plays  of  that  time  and  of  all  times. 

SLIDE- 

Painting,  Burbage,  Richard.  Portrait  of  Shakespeare  ( Lon- 
don, National  Gallery ) 

In  quaint  and  gentle  Stratford-town,  on  the  banks  of  the 
river  Avon,  young  Will  Shakespeare  had  a  good  background 
for  the  beauties  of  his  later  writing. 

SLIDE- 

Architecture,  English,  Renaissance.  Stratford 

Through  a  garden  of  rich,  purple  flowers  in  the  midst  of  cool 


147 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
LANGUAGE    ARTS 


Shakespeare's  house  in  Stratford-on-Avon.  Note  the  many  small- 

paned  windows. 

148 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 

green,  we  may  still  enter  Ann  Hathaway's  thatched  cottage  in 
Shottery,  not  far  away. 

SLIDE- 

Ar chit e dure,  English,  Renaissance.  Shottery,  Ann  Hatha- 
way s  Cottage 

Shakespeare's  two-storied  house  made  of  wooden  beams,  its 
roof  thatched,  its  gables  steep,  its  black  beams  on  the  outside 
checkering  the  walls  into  squares  and  triangles,  dormer  win- 
dows adding  to  its  charm,  is  again  an  example  of  the  mingling 
of  the  old  and  the  new. 

SLIDE- 

Architecture,  English,  Renaissance.  Henley  Street,  Shake- 
speare House 

But  shall  we  not  visit,  first,  a  theater  of  this  time? 

SLIDE- 

Dr awing,  De  Witt.  Swan  Theatre,  1593,  Interior 

It  is  summer,  and  a  bright  flag  is  waving  from  the  turret  to 
announce  that  the  play  is  about  to  begin  at  three  o'clock  in 
the  afternoon. 

SLIDE- 

Architecture,  English,  Renaissance.  Fortune  Theatre, 
London 

In  a  moment,  three  trumpet-blasts  will  proclaim  that  the 
performance  is  starting.  So,  let  us  hasten  to  enter  the  circular 

149 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
LANGUAGE    ARTS 

building,  its  roof  the  cloudless  blue  sky  except  for  the  stage, 
passages  and  galleries.  In  the  summer  theater,  the  pit,  or  yard, 
where  many  people  are  gathering,  is  always  open  to  the  sky. 

Everywhere  there  are  gay  colors,  for  the  Londoners  have 
come  in  holiday  array,  and  are  whiling  away  the  time  before 
the  play  begins  by  eating  nuts  and  apples,  and  by  drinking  ale. 

In  front  of  us  is  the  stage,  coming  well  out  into  the  pit, 
and  open  between  the  columns  at  the  sides  so  that  the  more 
favored  spectators  in  the  boxes  may  see  all  that  is  taking  place. 
There  is  no  curtain,  no  scenery.  The  playgoers  of  Queen  Eliza- 
beth's time  had  much  better  imaginations  than  we  have! 

SLIDE- 

Manners  and  Customs,  Domestic,  English.  An  Elizabethan 
**Plaie'  House 

The  name  of  the  play  is  hung  out  on  a  placard,  and  the 
prologue  appears,  robed  in  black  velvet.  With  many  bows  he 
tells  what  is  going  to  take  place,  begging  for  the  good  will  of 
the  audience.  Right  before  our  eyes,  the  "properties,"  such  as 
rocks,  branches  of  trees,  tables,  chairs,  are  put  in  place,  as  one 
scene  follows  another  without  pause. 

The  stage,  with  the  aid  of  the  vivid  imaginations  of  the 
spectators,  is  the  throne-room  of  a  palace,  dense  woods,  or  the 
waves  of  the  sea,  the  actors  moving  from  one  "scene"  to  an- 
other. The  upper  part  of  the  stage  in  the  rear  is  useful  in  bal- 
cony scenes  such  as  in  Romeo  and  Juliet.  The  actors,  dressed 
in  the  costumes  of  their  own  day,  even  though  they  may  be 
150 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 


representing  a  far  earlier  time,  enter  through  the  curtains  at 
the  rear  of  the  stage.  All  parts  are  played  by  men  or  boys.  The 
placard  has  just  been  put  up  informing  the  audience  that  they 
are  looking  upon  a  forest. 

Now  that  we  have  had  a  glimpse  of  what  is  taking  place,  we 
will  steal  away,  and  return  with  members  of  the  royal  court, 
when  Her  Majesty  appears! 

SLIDE- 

Painting,  Geeraerts,  M.  Visit  of  Queen  Elizabeth  to  Black- 
friars.  ( Sherborne  Castle ) 

STORY 
"  *Yo!  Ho!  And  the  Spanish  Main,' 
Sang  the  salt  sea  waves  of  old. 
The  Sea  Kings  bold  for  Queen  and  gold 
Ploughed  our  turbulent  plain/ 
Yo!  Ho!  for  good  Queen  Bess 
They  braved  the  Spanish  Main. 

SLIDE- 

Painting,  Heere,  Lucas  de.  Portrait  of  Queen  Elizabeth. 
( New  Haven,  Yale  University ) 

"The  whip  of  the  gale  as  it  lashes  the  sail, 
In  the  storm  as  it  rises  again. 
Yo!  Ho!  These  Sea  Kings  bold, 
Brave  and  daring  and  strong; 
With  cutlasses  long  they  righted  the  wrong— 
Yo!  Ho!  And  the  Spanish  Main!" 

151 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
LANGUAGE    ARTS 

Thus  sang  a  bronzed  sailor,  a  broad  felt  hat  set  jauntily  upon 
his  rough  black  hair,  big  golden  ear-rings  gleaming  in  the 
afternoon's  sun,  and  scarlet  trousers  reaching  barely  to  his 
bronzed  knees. 

SLIDE- 

Fainting,  Millais.  Boyhood  of  Walter  Raleigh  (London, 
National  Gallery) 

"Up  with  you,  now!*'  he  commanded  the  two  lads  who  had 
been  drinking  in  each  word  of  his  sea  stories.  "Shake  the  sand 
from  your  clothes,  and  we'll  be  on  our  way.  'Tis  so  long  since 
I  have  walked  on  land,  I  have  not  my  land  legs'  yet.  Busy  I 
have  been  with  helping  Captain  Drake,  Sir  Francis  as  now  he 
will  be  called  since  he  has  been  knighted  in  return  for  his  serv- 
ices by  no  other  than  Her  Majesty,  good  Queen  Bess.  'The 
Dragon'  with  his  little  ships  swept  down  upon  King  Philip's 
castle-like  galleons  and  drove  them  from  our  shores.  Queen 

SLIDE- 

Painting,  Lawrence.  Kiiighting  of  Sir  Walter  Raleigh.  (Lon- 
don, House  of  Parliament ) 

Bess  now  rules,  the  sovereign  of  the  sea  as  well  as  of  the  land. 

SLIDE- 

Painting,  Zuccaro,  Attributed  to.  Portrait  of  Queen  Eliza- 
beth. (London) 

And  I,  lads,  am  right  glad  I  was  in  the  thick  of  it,  though  I 
would  have  returned  before  this  to  Slough,  a  prettier  village 
152 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 


never  was,  had  I  not  shipped  again  with  Sir  Francis.  But  now 
here  I  am,  my  pockets  bulging  with  fine  silks  for  thy  mother, 
Master  Ned,  a  necklace  for  young  Prue,  and  a  box  of  rare  wood 
for  our  old  grandam."  ( Lights— As  story  continues ) 

There  was  great  rejoicing  that  night  in  the  little  village  of 
Slough  at  the  return  of  one  who  had  been  gone  from  them  so 

Queen  Elizabeth  and  her  courtiers  live  again  in  this  impersonation 
developed  by  elementary  school  pupils  after  hearing  a  story  of 
Queen  Bess  and  the  England  of  her  time. 


153 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
LANGUAGE    ARTS 

long  and  who  had  helped  to  rid  their  land  and  its  surrounding 
seas  of  the  dreaded  Spanish  foe.  Most  of  the  villagers,  old  and 
young,  gathered  at  the  Royal  Arms,  where  there  was  much 
rejoicing  and  merrymaking  as  he  who  had  sailed  with  the 
famed  hero,  Francis  Drake,  told  his  adventures. 

Dick,  Ned,  and  Prudence  sat  by  themselves,  apart,  in  a 
dusky  corner  which  the  candle-light  of  the  old  tavern  but 
poorly  lighted.  But  they  could  hear  just  as  well,  with  their  ears 
attuned  to  every  adventure  which  had  befallen  "The  Dragon's" 
ship,  "The  Golden  Hind,"  and  those  who  so  bravely  adven- 
tured in  it. 

Dick  and  Prue  were  very  proud  of  their  brother.  In  their 
eyes  he  was  just  as  great  a  hero  as  "The  Dragon"  himself,  every 
bit.  Ned  was  proud  of  him,  too,  but  he  was  more  proud  of  his 
father,  an  actor  in  the  Queen's  Players  who  performed  their 
plays  in  the  different  villages  and  towns  through  which  they 
passed.  They  hoped  to  receive  the  honor  of  playing  in  London 
before  the  Queen  at  Her  Majesty's  request.  It  was  enough  to 
make  any  boy  proud,  to  have  a  father  in  that  troupe.  Ned  was 
very  glad  they  happened  to  be  in  Slough  on  the  night  when 
Dick's  sailor  brother  came  home. 

"I'd  like  to  have  been  there  when  Jack  Drake,  page  to  the 
famous  captain  who  now  is  not  only  Admiral  of  Her  Majesty's 
fleet  but  her  honored  Knight,  first  caught  sight  of  the  Spanish 
Treasure  Ship  they  were  looking  for!  He  won  the  golden  chain 
promised  by  his  master!"  Thus  spoke  young  Mistress  Prue. 

"And  I,  when  they  sailed  upon  the  vast  unknown  waters  of 
154 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 


the  South  Sea,  or  when  they  looked  out  upon  both  seas.  Most 
of  all  rd  like  to  have  been  there  when  they  sailed  around  the 
world.  What  could  be  more  wonderful,  Ned,  than  to  be  the 
first  Englishman  to  sail  around  this  world  on  which  we  live?" 
breathed  Dick  rapturously. 

Ned  nodded.  Then  he  looked  very  earnest  as  he  said  rather 
low,  for  it  was  a  strange  thing  to  be  saying  on  that  night  of  all 
nights  with  Dick's  sailor  brother  just  returned  from  his  adven- 
tures, "If  I  could  have  my  choice,  Dick,  I  would  be  a  player 
like  my  Father,  and  act  my  plays  before  our  Queen  and  her 
court.  That's  what  I  would  do!  And,"  here  Ned  hesitated  a  bit, 
for  he  was  about  to  tell  something  which  had  been  in  his  in- 
most heart  for  some  time  but  which  never  before  had  he  told 
even  to  his  player-father,  his  greatest  chum. 

"I  would  one  day  meet  Master  Will  Shakespeare  of  Strat- 
ford who  has  won  fame  for  himself  in  London  Town  by  writ- 
ing verses  and  turning  them  into  plays  which  bring  him  great 
praise  from  Her  Majesty,  our  Queen.  My  father  says  he  is  the 
most  talked-of  man  in  London,  and  all  words  are  to  his  praise. 
And  my  Father  knows.  He  has  seen  this  Will  Shakespeare 
many  a  time,  and  once  watched  him  play  before  the  Queen. 
She  dropped  her  glove  near  him  while  walking  across  the 
stage  to  her  place  of  honor.  He  kept  his  part  of  king  in  the 
play,  picked  up  her  glove,  and  handed  it  to  her  with  a  bow 
which  greatly  pleased  her.  Such  beautiful  thoughts  he  puts 
into  words,  such  as  you  never  dreamed.  Here  are  some  of  them, 
the  talk  of  London  Town,  methinks. 

155 


ENRICHMENT  OF 
LANGUAGE  ARTS 

'How  sweet  the  moonlight  sleeps  upon  this  bank! 
Here  will  we  sit,  and  let  the  sounds  of  music 
Creep  in  our  ears;  soft  stillness  and  the  night 
Become  the  touches  of  sweet  harmony. 
Sit,  Jessica.  Look,  how  the  floor  of  heaven 
Is  thick  inlaid  with  patines  of  bright  gold; 

Come,  ho,  and  wake  Diana  with  a  hymn; 

And  draw  her  home  with  music' "  * 

"  Tis  beautiful,"  breathed  Prue,  starry-eyed.  "I,  too,  would 
like  to  meet  this  writer-actor.  Master  Will  Shakespeare. 
Wouldn't  you,  Dick?" 

Dick  nodded,  rather  vague  and  bewildered.  Fancy  being 
able  to  say  all  those  high  sounding  words!  He  admitted  to  him- 
self that  they  were  beautiful,  but  in  his  opinion  they  would 
have  been  more  beautiful  if  they  had  only  been  about  the  sea! 
"Yol  Ho!  And  the  Spanish  Main!"  his  sailor  brother  had  been 
singing.  He  could  better  understand  those  words. 

"Thus  Sir  Francis  and  the  other  brave  Sea  Kings  proved 
there  is  a  Queen  of  the  seas  as  well  as  a  King,"  the  returned 
seaman  was  boasting,  and  that  with  right  good  cause.  "Where 
now  are  the  galleons  of  Spain?  God  save  the  fair  and  brave 
Elizabeth,  our  Queen,  Mistress  over  land  and  sea!" 

All  glasses  were  right  quickly  and  loyally  raised,  and  a  rous- 
ing cheer  filled  the  little  tavern  so  completely  given  over  to 

*  From  Shakespeare's  "The  Merchant  of  Venice." 

156 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 


merrymaking.  But  before  the  sailor  could  go  on  with  his  tales 
which  held  spellbound  his  wide-eyed,  eager  listeners,  a 
courtier  clad  in  velvet  cape  and  broad  plumed  hat,  his  ruflF 
lace-edged,  thrust  open  the  door.  "In  the  Queen's  name!"  he 
cried.  "What  with  all  this  merrymaking  within  there  was  no 
hearing  my  knocking  without.  Her  Majesty  is  here!  On  journey 
to  the  castle  of  a  lord  not  far  distant,  the  wheel  of  her  royal 
carriage  was  lost  just  outside  of  Slough.  Make  room  for  Her 
Majesty!" 

Such  a  commotion  filled  the  little  tavern  of  the  Royal  Arms! 
Such  excitement  shook  the  village  of  Slough!  Torches  sent 
forth  their  flares,  brightening  the  quaint  little  streets  bordered 
by  gabled  houses  set  in  the  midst  of  gardens  blooming  with 
purple  flowers.  Trumpets  rent  the  stillness,  as  the  royal  pro- 
cession drew  near.  Courtiers  in  gold-embroidered  velvet,  fine 
pleated  ruffs,  wide  plumed  hats,  gold-hilted  swords  by  their 
sides,  gave  orders  for  the  Queen's  entertainment.  One,  a  tall 
noble,  drew  a  velvet  cape  more  closely  around  the  Queen  as 
he  rode  by  her  side,  carefully  guiding  her  horse.  Gaily  he  chat- 
tered with  Her  Majesty,  whose  blue  eyes  sparkled  and  whose 
auburn  hair,  jewel  decorated,  twinkled  with  changing  lights  as 
she  peered  this  way  and  that.  Truly,  this  adventure  was  much 
to  her  liking. 

"  'Tis  Sir  Water  Raleigh!"  exclaimed  the  excited  Ned  who 
had  run  to  his  father's  side.  "My  father  says  so!  He  is  the  one 
they  were  telling  of  the  other  night.  He  is  the  hero  I  was  tell- 
ing you  of  but  the  other  day,  my  sweet  Prue,  the  knight  who 

157 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
LANGUAGE    ARTS 


SO  gallantly  served  his  Queen.  Dost  remember?" 

"Nay,  and  if  I  do,  good  lad,  tell  me  once  again  ere  they  come 

inside,  an'  thou  wilt/' 

"He,  too,  has  always  loved  the  sea,  my  good  friend  Prue," 

began  Ned  as  they  watched  the  gorgeous  procession  draw  up 

at  the  tavern  door.  "Was  not  Master  Walter,  Sir  Walter  now. 


The  versatile  Elizabethan  stage  balcony  was  not  limited  in  use  to 
Romeo  and  Juliet.  Frequently  it  was  a  stage  in  itself. 


158 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 

a  boy  living  close  to  the  sea  in  Devon?  He  heard  all  the  brave 
tales  of  Sir  John  Hawkins  and  Sir  .Francis  Drake  who  ad- 
ventured upon  the  strange  seas,  and  longed  to  be  with  them. 
So  he  manned  a  ship  to  help  defeat  the  dread  Spanish  foe. 
More  than  that  he  sent  colonies  to  the  New  World  across  the 
great  Western  Ocean  for  his  Queen.  One  of  them  is  named 
Virginia  in  honor  of  Her  Majesty,  the  Virgin  Queen.  By  her 
own  hand  he  was  knighted  even  as  thy  brother's  master,  Sir 
Francis  Drake  of  the  'Golden  Hind'.  And  this  is  the  way  it 
came  about. 

"One  showery  day,  when  clouds  seemed  full  eager  to  chase 
the  sun  away,  the  Queen  went  walking  from  her  palace.  All 
her  wise  counsellors  and  courtiers,  her  gay  and  splendid  court 
ladies,  her  cavaliers,  followed  her.  Jewels  gleamed  from  her 
red  hair  as  they  do  on  this  night.  Mayhap,  my  good  Dick,  some 
of  these  very  jewels  were  in  the  Spanish  ships  your  bold  sea- 
man brother  helped  'The  Dragon  to  capture.  No  doubt  her 
great  collar  of  cobwebby  lace  rose  high  above  her  head  as  it 
does  now.  Jewels  gleamed  over  almost  every  inch  of  her,  even 
upon  her  little  shoes  as  we  can  plainly  see  in  the  torch  light. 

"A  heavy  shower  had  left  a  large  muddy  place  directly  in 
her  path,  though  the  sun,  reappearing,  had  caused  it  to  sparkle. 

"  *My  shoes  will  take  ill  to  the  mud,'  laughed  the  Queen,  so 
they  tell  the  tale,  and  she  held  up  her  wide  jewelled  skirt,  not 
liking  to  venture.  'And  your  pretty  feet  as  well,'  said  a  courtier 
with  a  deep  bow,  hoping,  methinks,  to  receive  favor  from  the 
Queen  because  of  his  gallant  speech.  But  Master  Raleigh,  no 

159 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
LANGUAGE    ARTS 


dealer  in  pretty  words  without  gallant  deeds,  sprang  forward 
on  the  instant  and  spread  his  embroidered  velvet  cape  over 
the  muddy  place  before  his  Queen. 

"  'Well  hast  thou  served  thy  Queen,'  declared  Her  Majesty, 
much  pleased  as  she  tripped  lightly  across  the  velvet  bridge, 
1  shall  reward  thy  courtesy  for  thou  art  truly  a  gallant  knight/ 

"Sir  Walter  she  made  him  and  she  likes  full  well  to  keep  him 
by  her  side,  making  him  Captain  of  the  Queen's  Guard,  Lord 
Lieutenant  of  Cornwall,  and  Vice  Admiral  of  Devon!  Not 
only  is  Sir  Walter  brave  and  bold,  as  brave  as  Sir  Francis,  but 
he  has  a  ready  wit  and  is  a  maker  of  pretty  verses  which  help 
Her  Majesty  pass  pleasantly  many  an  hour.  But  look  you,  Dick 
and  sweet  Prue,  such  jealous  glances  rest  upon  him  from  the 
other  courtiers.  Methinks  trouble  will  be  brewing  in  the  court 
for  'tis  said  that  the  head  of  the  Queen's  favorite  is  never  long 
safe.  But  come,  let  us  go  again  to  our  corner  where  we  can 
see  clearly  what  takes  place,  for  Her  Majesty  is  about  to  enter 
our  tavern.  Truly,  Slough  and  the  Royal  Arms  will  long  be 
remembered  as  the  place  where  her  Majesty,  Queen  Bess, 
stopped  one  night  when  the  wheel  from  her  royal  carriage  was 
lost." 

It  was  a  most  wonderful  evening.  There  was  the  sparkle  of 
jewels,  the  flashing  of  swords  in  the  torch  and  candle  light, 
witty  sayings  and  even  hearty  laughter  for  the  Queen  was  in 
the  best  of  humor  over  affairs  both  at  home  and  abroad.  Was 
she  not  the  acknowledged  mistress  of  the  land  and  the  sea? 
Had  she  not  bold  Sea  Kings  who  had  filled  her  coffers  from  the 
160, 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 


Spanish  treasure  ships  and  protected  her  from  her  arch  enemy, 
King  PhiHp  of  Spain?  What  other  sovereign  had  a  more  bril- 
hant  court,  more  loyal  subjects?  One  toast  followed  another, 
and  the  tavern-master  quite  outdid  himself  in  the  matter  of 
cooking.  Savory  odors  filled  the  tavern  room  and  brought  a 
pang  of  hunger  for  a  taste  of  the  roasts  and  the  pasties  even 
to  those  who  had  supped  before. 

Ned's  cup  of  happiness  was  filled  to  overflowing.  Her 
Majesty  had  called  for  the  Queen's  Players  and  blessed  her 
good  fortune  that  they  were  in  Slough.  She  applauded  the 
dancing,  the  music,  the  acting,  the  poem  which  Ned's  father 
recited  hailing  her  as  Queen  of  the  Seas  and  the  Land.  Bells 
jingled,  pipes  played,  drums  throbbed,  feet  twinkled,  nymphs 
danced  amidst  the  green,  weaving  garlands  of  flowers.  When 
the  Goddess  of  Beauty  appeared  and  with  most  pleasing  words 
handed  her  sceptre  of  beauty  to  Queen  Bess,  the  applause 
could  have  been  heard  as  far  away  as  Maidenhead. 

Then  it  was  that  Her  Majesty  sent  for  the  leader,  the  chief 
actor,  Ned's  father.  Ned's  heart  was  near  to  bursting  with 
pride  when  he  heard  her  say,  "Thou  dost  please  me  well, 
sirrah,  and  I  would  have  thee  and  thy  company  perform  be- 
fore me  in  London.  Nay,  more,  I  would  have  thee  meet  Master 
Will  Shakespeare,  the  best  poet  and  play-writer  in  all  Eng- 
land. Master  Shakespeare  is  an  actor  as  well,  and  mayhap  it 
would  please  thee  and  thy  company  to  see  one  of  his  new 
plays  such  as  hold  the  court  and  their  Queen  spellbound.  He 
is  with  the  Lord  Chamberlain's  Company  in  London  now, 

161 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
LANGUAGE    ARTS 

writing  plays  with  his  ready  pen  and  acting  in  them,  too.  I 
will  recommend  thee  to  him  for  this  company.  Thou  hast  done 
so  well,  sirrah,  that  mayhap  thou  wilt  one  day  be  made 
'Master  of  the  Revels'  at  court.  There  thy  gift  would  have  full 
play  in  preparing  masques,  plays,  and  pageants.  Await  on  me 
in  London  a  week  hence." 

"To  think  on  it!"  exclaimed  Prue,  "thy  dream  has  really 
come  true.  Thou  wilt  see  Master  Will  Shakespeare.  Pray  re- 
member, Ned,  all  about  the  playhouse  and  the  actors  and  the 
costumes  that  they  wear.  Dick  and  I  will  be  watching  for  thy 
safe  return,  an'  thou  tell  us  not  all  about  London  Town  it  will 
go  hard  with  thee,  sirrah!" 

Dick  was  glad  that  his  playfellow  was  to  be  so  honored  but 
he  would  have  liked  to  go  along,  too.  "Never  you  mind,  my 
sweet  duck,  you  shall  go  with  me  to  London  when  next  I  go 
to  meet  my  master  on  the  'Golden  Hind',"  comforted  his 
brother. 

Ned  was  all  eyes  and  ears  in  London.  Narrow  streets  packed 
close  with  wooden  houses  and  shops  displaying  their  beckon- 
ing wares,  Saint  Paul's  towering  majestic  and  dignified  towards 
the  sky,  London  Bridge  supported  by  great  arches,  and  a 
multitude  of  strange  boats  in  the  River  Thames,  all  fascinated 
him. 

"Dick  would  like  to  be  looking  at  them,"  thought  Ned,  a 
pang  of  homesickness  shaking  him  even  in  the  midst  of  such 
absorbing  sights  as  the  city  offered.  There  were  most  wonder- 
ful big  houses,  so  different  from  the  little  gabled  cottages  in 
162 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 

Slough,  some  of  them  built  in  the  shape  of  the  letter  E  in  honor 
of  Elizabeth,  the  Queen,  with  ever  so  many  square-topped 
windows  one  right  underneath  the  other,  all  seeming  to  peer 
down  at  him. 

"Methinks  it  must  be  too  warm  in  the  hot  sunshine  within," 
muttered  Ned,  "and  overly  cold  when  the  winter  winds  are 
blowing/' 

The  great  event  at  last  arrived,  though  it  had  seemed  to  the 
eager  Ned  as  if  it  never  would.  They  had  actually  entered 
the  big  circular  theater  on  the  bankside  of  the  river.  A  con- 
fused mass  of  gay  colors  met  Ned's  eyes,  and  a  medley  of 
sound,  laughter,  talking,  music,  drummed  upon  his  ears. 
Everyone  was  merry,  out  for  a  good  time.  From  the  pit  of  the 
house  Ned  looked  up  at  the  blue  of  the  mid-afternoon  sky,  at 
the  flag  waving  from  the  turret  to  tell  all  folk  that  there  would 
be  a  performance  that  afternoon.  He  glanced  at  the  stage. 
"The  Venetian  Comedy",  he  read  from  the  placard.  That 
sounded  good.  He  was  glad  that  there  would  be  some  laughter 
in  it.  That  was  why  he  liked  his  father's  plays  and  pageants. 
There  were  few  tears  in  them,  and  Ned  thought,  as  did  Prue 
and  Dick,  that  laughter  was  far  better  than  tears. 

Ned  felt  rather  sorry  for  all  the  people  standing  in  the  pit 
of  the  house  before  the  stage,  as  he  took  the  seat  offered  him 
by  his  father's  side  in  one  of  the  boxes  to  the  left  of  the  stage. 
But  they  seemed  to  be  having  a  right  jolly  time— chatting, 
drinking,  and  eating.  He  wouldn't  mind  a  nut  or  two,  himself. 
All  around  him  in  the  boxes,  to  the  right  of  the  stage  as  well 

163 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
LANGUAGE    ARTS 

as  the  left,  were  such  gorgeous  ladies  and  splendid  cavaliers 
that  Ned  was  sure  they  were  of  the  court. 

"Watch  for  Her  Majesty/'  whispered  his  father.  "She  will 
be  here  soon,  lad.  What  think  ye,  my  sweet  Ned,  she  said  to 
me  this  very  day?  That  we  may  see  the  great  Master  Will 
Shakespeare  after  his  play  is  through.  'Tis  an  honor,  mind  you, 
lad,  that  your  father  and  you  are  receiving!" 

Ned  pressed  his  father's  hand  and  sat  as  close  as  he  could 

Prologue  and  placard  draw  the  attention  of  those  in  the  pit  to  the 
presentation  of  a  Shakespearean  play. 


164 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 


to  his  side.  Mayhap  one  day  his  own  actor-father  would  be 
upon  that  very  stage,  doing  his  part  before  the  Queen.  Aye, 
that  was  a  thought  to  juggle  with! 

Of  a  sudden  there  was  a  great  commotion.  "Surely  the 
Queen  is  coming!"  thought  Ned.  But  'twas  only  a  pickpocket 
caught  and  tied  to  a  post  on  the  stage  for  all  eyes  to  gaze  at 
and  for  folk  to  pelt  with  apples  if  they  were  good  marksmen. 

A  sudden  blare  of  trumpets  and  cries  of  "Her  Majesty, 
Queen  of  Merry  England!"  proclaimed  that  she  was  being 
led  to  her  seat  of  honor  upon  the  platform,  itself.  Ned  recog- 
nized some  of  the  courtiers  he  had  seen  that  night  at  the  Royal 
Arms.  There  was  one  who  had  not  been  at  the  Queen's  side 
then  but  who  claimed  royal  attention  now.  He  was  good  to 
look  upon,  his  eyes  bright  and  sparkling,  his  chin  ending  in 
the  same  little  pointed  beard  that  Sir  Walter  and  Sir  Francis 
and  all  the  courtiers  boasted.  He  seemed  to  be  bubbling  over 
with  energy.  A  velvet  cape  hung  well  back  upon  his  shoulders 
over  his  embroidered  doublet,  and  a  crisply  pleated  ruff 
framed  his  eager  face.  His  plumed  hat  was  held  carelessly  in 
one  hand  while  with  the  other  he  called  Her  Majesty's  atten- 
tion to  certain  things  of  interest  upon  the  stage. 

The  play  progressed.  Ned  sat  breathless  in  his  chair,  no 
longer  in  London  Town  but  with  the  characters  upon  the 
stage,  in  the  colorful  city  of  Venice. 

Hark!  There  were  the  very  words  his  father  had  taught  him 
and  he  loved  so  well,  words  which  had  always  made  beautiful 
pictures  as  he  heard  his  father  say  them. 

165 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
LANGUAGE    ARTS 

*How  sweet  the  moonlight  sleeps  upon  this  bank! 
Here  will  we  sit,  and  let  the  sounds  of  music 
Creep  in  our  ears;  soft  stillness  and  the  night 
Become  the  touches  of  sweet  harmony/ 

Now  he  was  seeing  enacted  the  very  play  of  Master  Shake- 
speare from  which  those  words  came!  Ned  was  almost  over- 
whelmed in  his  delight,  so  much  so  that  he  did  not  see  his 
father  rise  and  bow  as  some  one  approached  him.  Nor  did  he 
notice  his  father's  delighted  face  or  hear  the  whispered  words, 
until  he  heard  his  own  name  spoken. 

"Master  Ned,"  a  kind  strange  voice  was  saying,  "your  father 
tells  me  you  came  here  on  purpose  to  see  me.  I  am  honored, 
sweet  lad.  Grow  up  with  this  same  love  of  the  stage  with  which 
your  good  father  has  endowed  thee,  and  mayhap  you  will  be 
acting  in  one  of  my  plays  before  the  Queen  as  your  good  father 
will  soon  be  doing." 

Ned  gasped.  'Twas  the  kind-faced  courtier  who  had  been 
seated  by  her  Majesty.  He  had  come  to  their  box  on  purpose 
to  speak  to  them.  Truly  Queen  Bess  was  very  kind  to  send 
him,  for  it  must  be  Master  Will  Shakespeare,  himself!  Ned 
could  only  bow  and  look  up  at  the  great  writer  and  actor  with 
worshipful  eyes. 

"One  day  you  must  come  to  Stratford,  lad,  and  see  my  son 
Hammet  of  about  your  own  age,  and  my  sweet  mouse,  Judith. 
A  good  time  I  warrant  you  would  all  have  in  the  fields  on  both 
sides  of  the  river,  all  velvety  green  and  blossoming  with 
166 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 


posies.  On  a  May  Day  you  shall  come  with  your  father  when 
the  Queen's  Players  will  entertain  us  with  dances  and  masques. 
Good  Master  Player,  I  shall  see  you  and  your  sweet  lad  again 
for  soon  you  will  be  with  me  in  the  Lord  Chamberlain's  Com- 
pany. Fare-you-well,  now,  good  friends.  Her  Majesty  is 
waiting." 

It  seemed  to  Ned  as  if  he  could  not  wait  to  get  back  to 
Slough,  happy  as  he  had  been  in  London  Town.  So  much  he 
had  to  tell.  To  think  that  his  father  was  to  receive  a  coat-of- 
arms  and  be  able  to  have  "Gentleman"  put  after  his  name! 
How  he  would  talk  of  his  meeting  with  Master  Will  Shake- 
speare! Dick  and  Prue  would  see  him,  too,  and  enjoy  his  plays 
when  they  moved  to  London  Town. 


167 


1.  Enricnment  oi  tne  Sciences 
Examples  oi  Programs 


IT  IS  MOST  ESSENTIAL  today  that  the  sciences  be 
made  a  Hving  part  of  every  school  curriculum.  World  events, 
news  items,  current  films,  radio  programs,  all  include  an  in- 
creasing number  of  references  to  work  done  in  the  field  of 
science,  and  preparation  for  citizenship  in  the  world  demands 
a  knowledge  of  basic  scientific  information. 

Even  before  World  War  II  called  upon  the  talents  and 
skills  of  scientists  to  work  for  mankind  in  general,  the  increas- 
ing importance  of  science  in  our  daily  life  had  become  ap- 
parent. Whereas  the  student  of  yesterday  had  little  need  to 
draw  upon  an  understanding  of  chemistry,  biology,  physics, 
electronics  or  radio  theory,  the  student  of  today  accepts  these 
subjects  and  makes  them  a  part  of  his  everyday  life.  It  is  desir- 
able that  he  do  this,  for  the  modern  world  is  being  built  upon 
products  conceived  and  developed  in  the  laboratories.  This 
subject  area  in  the  curriculum  should  very  definitely  be  made 
real  to  students  of  all  grades  through  utilization  of  audio- 
visual aids. 

Probably  one  reason  that  less  emphasis  was  formerly  placed 
upon  the  importance  of  the  sciences  in  the  elementary  and 
high  school  curricula  was  due  to  the  fact  that  these  subjects 
were  considered  to  be  of  value  only  for  the  student  who 
contemplated  a  career  as  a  chemist,  a  doctor,  an  engineer,  or 
a  professional  research  worker. 

Today,  every  child  accepts  radio  as  part  of  the  equipment 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
SCIENCES 

of  living  and  wants  to  know  the  principles  underlying  the  con- 
struction and  operation  of  a  radio  set.  The  airplane  is  an  ac- 
cepted means  of  modern  transportation,  and  your  school  boy 
or  girl  wants  to  know  what  keeps  a  plane  aloft  and  in  flight. 
Plastic  materials  are  everyday  commodities,  but  the  boy  and 
girl  of  today  wants  to  know  how  they  are  prepared  and  how 
they  should  be  used.  It  is  essential  that  the  modern  school 
child  be  equipped  with  sufiicient  fundamental,  basic,  scien- 
tific information  to  understand  this  world  in  which  he  lives. 
This  understanding  must  include  a  general  knowledge  of  the 
sciences  as  well  as  of  the  social  studies,  arts,  languages  and 
crafts. 

Methods  and  techniques  for  the  presentation  of  the  science 
subjects  need  vitalizing.  Too  much  emphasis  has  been  placed 
on  the  learning  of  formulas  and  not  enough  emphasis  placed  on 
practical  adaptations  of  these  same  formulas.  The  effective 
utilization  of  audio-visual  teaching  materials  is  necessary  if 
laboratory  experiments  are  to  be  interpreted  in  terms  of  human 
situations.  The  mathematical  formulas  which  produce  energy 
are  of  no  value  if  the  energy  produced  is  not  of  use  to  man  in 
his  environment. 

Many  of  the  audio- visual  aids  used  in  the  classroom  are  the 
result  of  the  application  of  modern  scientific  principles.  There- 
fore, these  same  aids  can  be  made  of  value  in  vitalizing  a  study 
of  these  same  principles.  A  simple  explanation  of  the  princi- 
ples of  optics  and  their  relation  to  a  motion  picture  projector 
will  often  prove  valuable  as  a  means  of  increasing  appreciation 
170 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
SCIENCES 

of  modern  equipment.  This  same  procedure  may  be  applied  to 
any  of  the  various  machines  used  in  this  work.  An  understand- 
ing and  an  appreciation  of  the  role  played  by  equipment  should 
be  one  aim  if  these  aids  are  to  be  made  part  of  the  school 
program. 

A  lesson  in  physics  will  become  real  to  the  student  who  has 

Visual  aids  are  very  important  in  science  studies.  Here  a  high 
school  biology  student  in  Tomball,  Texas,  examines  microbes  with 
a  microscope. 


171 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
SCIENCES 


seen  a  film  depicting  the  processing  of  uranium;  a  lesson  in 
modern  chemistry  will  take  on  meaning  to  the  student  who  has 
seen  a  film  showing  the  role  of  plastics  in  the  modern  world; 
a  chemical  formula  which  has  been  a  mere  compilation  of 
symbols  and  numbers  may  suddenly  become  clear  to  the  visu- 
ally-minded student  when  he  sees  this  same  formula  illustrated 
on  a  filmstrip;  the  processing  of  steel  takes  on  new  life  and 
vigor  to  the  student  who  has  heard  a  recording  of  the  sounds 
in  a  steel  mill.  Scientific  experimentation  and  study  have  given 
us  so  many  of  the  materials  which  we  use  in  the  classroom.  We 
should  give  back  to  the  study  of  these  sciences  the  products 
which  they  have  helped  to  create. 

Stories  and  accounts  of  the  lives  and  works  of  world-famous 
scientists  should  be  made  a  part  of  a  study  of  any  one  of  the 
sciences.  The  reading  of  the  life  of  George  Washington  Carver 
or  Marie  Curie  provides  the  student  with  information  which 
enables  him  to  form  a  mental  picture  of  these  persons  and 
their  places  in  the  world  of  science.  Then,  if  motion  pictures, 
filmstrips,  lantern  slides  or  a  combination  of  these  aids,  dealing 
with  the  same  subjects  and  people,  are  shown  to  him,  the  vis- 
ual medium  enables  him  to  see  the  living  personalities.  He 
sees  the  people  and  events  of  the  world  of  science  as  he  has 
seen  the  people  and  events  of  history,  literature  and  art. 

It  is  important  that  the  work  of  individual  scientists  be  made 
real  to  the  child,  in  order  that  he  gain  an  appreciation  not  only 
of  these  individuals  but  also  of  the  part  that  he  himself  may 
take  if  he  chooses  to  work  in  these  same  fields. 
172 


MOTION    PICTURES 
SLIDES,    FILMSTRIPS 

The  use  of  audio-visual  aids  in  the  teaching  of  the  sciences 
will  help  to  break  down  rigid  subject  barriers  which  have  long 
existed.  For  instance,  the  motion  picture  just  mentioned  deal- 
ing with  the  life  of  Carver  will  show  how  he  drew  upon  a 
knowledge  of  chemistry,  biology,  physics  and  other  subjects. 
The  film  showing  how  modern  plastic  materials  are  made  will 
illustrate  how  chemistry  and  physics  are  combined.  Still  an- 
other film  dealing  with  the  pasteurization  of  milk  may  be  used 
to  illustrate  principles  of  biology,  chemistry  and  scientific 
dairying.  It  is  to  be  hoped  that  many  films  will  soon  be  made 
to  demonstrate  how  the  factual  information  learned  in  the 
different  sciences  can  all  help  to  produce  new  materials,  new 
products,  new  foods,  new  methods  of  agriculture.  The  factual 
content  taught  in  one  branch  of  the  sciences  is  often  the  basis 
for  further  study  in  another  science.  The  use  of  many  types  of 
audio- visual  aids  will  help  emphasize  this  connection.  Teach- 
ers should  try  to  select  and  use  audio-visual  aids  which  will 
bring  out  this  point  and  at  the  same  time  clarify  and  vitalize 
the  subject  matter  itself  so  that  it  takes  on  real  value  to  the 
child. 

MOTION  PICTURES,  LANTERN  SLIDES  AND 
FILMSTRIPS.  As  has  been  pointed  out  in  the  preceding 
section,  the  motion  picture  can  be  made  a  very  eflFective  aid 
in  the  teaching  of  any  of  the  sciences.  The  lantern  slide  and 
filmstrip  should  also  be  included  among  the  aids  used  in  teach- 
ing these  same  subjects.  In  the  case  of  both  the  lantern  slide 

173 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
SCIENCES 


and  the  filmstrip,  the  image  or  picture  shown  may  be  held  on 
the  screen  for  a  longer  period  than  is  possible  with  the  motion 
picture.  This  is  a  distinct  advantage  in  science  classes,  where 
the  pupil  must  learn  recognition  of  objects,  such  as  the  parts 
of  a  flower,  anatomical  structure,  or  the  parts  of  a  dynamo  or 
engine.  Furthermore,  the  teacher  herself  controls  the  speed 
at  which  lantern  slides  or  filmstrips  are  changed  or  moved. 
This  adds  to  their  value  in  these  classes,  for  detailed  study  of 
figures  and  diagrams  is  necessary. 

Pupil-made  motion  pictures,  lantern  slides  and  filmstrips 
are  especially  valuable  for  use  in  science  classes.  Principles 
learned  in  chemistry  and  physics  classes  become  of  practical 
value  in  the  making  of  these  aids.  Moreover,  it  is  well  for  teach- 
ers to  make  up  sets  of  slides  showing  diagrams,  formulas,  equa- 
tions and  processes.  These  slides,  shown  on  the  screen  while 
some  experiment  is  in  process,  will  help  to  keep  before  the 
pupils  a  picture  of  the  principles  underlying  whatever  experi- 
ment they  are  perfoiming.  These  principles  might  otherwise 
be  temporarily  forgotten  in  the  thrill  of  performing  an  actual 
experiment. 

RADIO  AND  TELEVISION.  Radio  and  television  are 
both  outstanding  examples  of  how  science  has  contributed  to 
modern  life.  They  may  be  effectively  used  in  two  ways  in  the 
school  program.  In  the  first  instance,  factual  information  con- 
cerning the  construction  and  operation  of  both  radio  and  tele- 
vision sets  may  constitute  the  subject  matter  of  a  lesson.  In 
174 


RADIO    AND 
TELEVISION 


the  second  instance  radio  and  television  may  be  the  media 
through  which  additional  information  on  many  subjects  is 
brought  to  the  children.  It  should  be  as  much  a  part  of  the 
classroom  procedure  for  science  classes  to  listen  to  the  broad- 
casting of  scientific  meetings  and  programs  as  for  social  studies 
classes  to  listen  to  political  meetings.  As  television  becomes 
more  universally  available,  it  may  well  be  possible  for  science 
classes  to  observe  demonstrations  and  become  familiar  with 
the  techniques  of  famous  scientists. 

The  winner  of  the  Soap  Box  Derby  is  televised  for  telecasting  to 
youthful  fans— thus  increasing  the  interest  of  budding  engineers. 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
SCIENCES 

EXPERIMENTS  AND  DEMONSTRATIONS.  The 
demonstration-experiment  technique  has  long  been  consid- 
ered a  regular  feature  in  the  teaching  of  the  sciences.  Such 
demonstrations,  however,  should  not  become  mere  routine. 
Science  is  bringing  new  materials,  new  foods,  new  drugs,  new 
products  into  our  lives.  Examples  of  these  contributions  should 
be  brought  to  class  wherever  possible  (or  lantern  slides  or 
films  illustrating  these  new  materials  should  be  shown ) .  Dio- 
ramas, flat  prints,  and  any  of  the  other  audio-visual  aids  should 
be  used  in  the  science  classes  to  stimulate  interest  in  the  sub- 
ject under  immediate  discussion.  It  is  important  to  show  the 
interdependence  of  the  various  sciences  and  the  other  subjects 
included  in  the  school  curriculum.  We  should  use  the  same 
types  of  teaching  aids  that  are  used  in  the  other  classes,  or  we 
will  continue  to  lean  upon  memorization  and  experimentation 
as  the  only  methods  to  use  in  teaching  the  sciences. 

SCHOOL  JOURNEYS  AND  TREASURE  TRIPS.  If 
the  treasure  trip  may  be  said  to  make  objects  and  peoples 
come  alive  for  the  social  studies,  it  is  equally  true  that  it  does 
the  same  for  the  sciences.  A  trip  to  a  glass-making  factory,  a 
foundry,  a  testing  laboratory,  will  clothe  an  otherwise  drab 
and  routine  science  lesson  with  life  and  reality.  The  student 
who  has  watched  the  process  of  pasteurizing  milk  will  have 
a  clear  picture  of  what  actually  takes  place  in  a  modern  dairy. 
The  sciences  deal  with  concrete,  definite  subject  material. 
Therefore,  any  teaching  aid  which  helps  to  make  a  subject 
176 


COMBINATION 
OF    AIDS 

concrete  and  definite  for  the  pupil  should  be  utilized.  When- 
ever possible  science  classes  should  be  taken  to  museums,  fac- 
tories, laboratories,  and  other  places  where  they  may  observe 
actual  scientific  specimens  and  processes. 

SELECTION  AND  COMBINATION  OF  AIDS.  It  is 
impossible  to  lay  down  any  rules  or  formulas  for  the  most 
effective  audio-visual  aids  to  be  used  in  teaching  any  of  the 
sciences.  Modern  science  is  cooperating  to  make  the  modern 
world.  Thus  we  can  only  repeat  that  the  sensory  teaching  aid 
or  combination  of  aids  which  best  illustrates  and  vitalizes  the 
subject  under  consideration  is  the  best  aid  to  use  for  that  sub- 
ject. Science  teachers  should  beware  of  establishing  routine 
practices  and  procedures  to  illustrate  basic  principles.  Basic 
principles  are  likely  to  be  employed  in  new  combinations— and 
the  alert  science  teacher  will  use  the  aids  which  most  clearly 
show  these  changes  and  adaptations. 


177 


Examples  of  Programs 


Egbert,  the  mechanical  man  at  the  Frankhn  Institute  in  Philadel- 
phia, greets  feminine  admirers. 

It  has  frequently  been  said  that  4:he  social  studies  benefited 
most  from  the  use  of  audio-visual  materials,  and  that  most  of 
the  materials  now  available  for  classroom  use  were  appropri- 
ate only  for  this  subject  area.  It  is  true  that  this  was  the  situa- 
178 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 

tion  until  quite  recently.  But  the  current  interest  of  youth  of 
school  age  in  radio,  television,  electronics,  and  the  other  sci- 
ences has  made  it  necessary  to  provide  materials  which  will 
be  of  value  in  teaching  these  subjects  in  the  classroom. 

At  the  Franklin  Institute  in  Philadelphia  the  staff  has  out- 
lined a  number  of  programs,  which  although  planned  as  radio 
programs,  are  particularly  well  suited  for  classroom  use  even 
when  the  radio  section  of  the  program  is  omitted.  To  para- 
phrase the  report  of  the  Director  of  Education  at  the  Insti- 
tute,* the  radio  program  was  directed  toward  the  elementary 
schools,  adopting  the  theme  "Science  Is  Fun."  It  was  broadcast 
every  Monday  afternoon  at  2:15  p.m.  over  Station  WFIL  for 
the  purpose  of  dramatizing  events  of  science  and  highlighting 
the  offerings  at  the  museum  and  planetarium.  Egbert,  the 
famous  mechanical  man,  a  feature  of  the  Institute,  was  brought 
to  life  in  the  broadcasts  and  children  took  part  in  the  program. 
A  teachers'  manual,  containing  synopses,  suggested  activities, 
vocabularies  and  booklists,  was  sent  to  every  teacher  of  grades 
three  to  six  in  Philadelphia  and  the  surrounding  area.  An  eval- 
uation committee  visited  classrooms  to  watch  pupil  reactions 
to  the  progi'ams  and  to  make  suggestions  to  teachers.  A  similar 
series  is  now  being  prepared  for  the  high  school  level.  Films 
listed  in  the  programs  are  available  only  to  the  schools  of  Phila- 

*  The  project  was  suggested  by  Miss  Gertrude  Golden,  District  Superintend- 
ent, Philadelphia  Public  Schools.  It  was  carried  out  by  a  steering  committee 
under  the  chairmanship  of  Armand  Spitz,  Director  of  Education,  The  Frank- 
lin Institute,  with  Miss  Ruth  Weir  Miller,  Radio  Assistant,  Philadelphia  Public 
Schools,  in  charge  of  the  project. 

179 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
SCIENCES 


delphia,  but  if  other  teachers  desire  to  use  them,  information 
as  to  where  to  secure  them  may  be  obtained  by  writing  to  the 
Department  of  Education,  The  Frankhn  Institute,  Philadel- 
phia, Pennsylvania.  Transcriptions  of  the  programs  were  also 
made  for  use  in  Philadelphia  schools,  and  it  is  to  be  hoped  that 
these  transcriptions  will  soon  be  available  to  schools  in  other 
parts  of  the  country. 


UNIT -TRANSPORTATION 

THE    WHEEL 

THE  STORY.  Man  first  was  limited  in  his  knowledge  of  the 
world  to  that  portion  which  he  could  see,  but  he  soon  began  to 
travel  away  from  home  on  foot  in  search  of  food  and  for  other 
purposes.  The  developnient  of  methods  of  carrying  himself,  his 
family  and  his  possessions  marks  the  beginning  of  the  science 
of  transportation.  The  invention  of  the  wheel  was  the  first  step 
which  made  possible  a  traveling  civilization  and  brought 
about  a  sharing  of  the  cultures  of  many  parts  of  the  world. 
Egbert  will  tell  about  the  construction  of  the  Pyramids  with 
the  moving  of  weights  on  rollers,  and  will  trace  the  wheel  up 
to  the  present  time. 

let's  LEARN  NEW  WORDS 

Horseless  buggy        Pharaoh        tomb        Khufu        pyramid 

( Fay-roh )  ( Koo-f  oo ) 

180 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 

SET  THE  SCENE 

Talk  about  all  kinds  of  vehicles  on  wheels,  past  and  present. 
Create  a  bulletin  board  display  showing  progress  of  transpor- 
tation on  wheels. 

Let  class  contribute  what  they  know  about  early  use  of  wheels. 
( Indians,  Chinese,  etc. ) 
Study  about  Egypt  and  the  Pyramids. 

Discuss  modern  use  of  "rollers'*  to  move  heavy  machinery,  etc. 
Make  a  class  scrapbook  ( or  individual  ones )  showing  progress 
of  transportation. 
Reports  on  early  cars,  trains,  carts,  chariots,  etc. 

LET  S  LISTEN  FOR 

1.  How  the  roller  lightened  the  labor  for  men. 

2.  Why  the  building  of  the  Pyramids  was  such  slow  work. 

3.  What  animals  were  used  for  early  transportation. 

4.  What  kind  of  transportation  poor  people  used. 

5.  Why  coaches  were  uncomfortable. 

WHAT  EVERY  CHILD  WILL  WANT  TO  KNOW 

QUESTION:  What  are  some  familiar  uses  of  the  wheel  in  addi- 
tion to  moving  vehicles? 

answer:  Steering  wheel,  pulley,  fishing  reel,  gears  in  clocks 
and  motors. 

TRY  IT  YOURSELF:    EXPERIMENT 

Build  a  miniature  "sand  table"  pyramid  under  construction 
with  blocks  on  rollers— partially  built  pyramids,  etc. 

181 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
SCIENCES 

Experiment  with  round  objects  such  as  pencils,  rolHng  books 
over  the  desk,  to  show  the  difference  between  shding  and 
rolling. 

Try  dragging  across  the  floor  a  box  weighted  with  books.  Then 
slip  wheels  or  rollers  under  the  box,  and  try  again. 

let's  READ 

Harter,  Helen.  How  We  Travel.  Follett  Publishing  Co.  Chi- 
cago, III.  Pp.  31.  Pictures  particularly  applicable  to  use  of  the 
w^heel  in  transportation. 

Petersham.  Story  of  the  Wheel.  John  C.  Winston  Co.,  Phila- 
delphia. 

let's  see  a  moving  picture 

Development  of  Transportation.  11  min.  sound  film.  Shows  the 
types  of  natural  barriers  which  for  ages  compelled  isolation  of 
various  peoples.  Describes  the  contribution  of  the  steam  loco- 
motive, the  gasoline  engine,  and  the  development  of  the  rail- 
way systems  in  the  United  States.  Depicts  man's  conquest  of 
sea  and  air. 

Transportation,  Part  1. 15  min.  silent  film.  Shows  the  Egyptian 
sled  and  dog  sled,  early  car,  prairie  schooner,  stage  coach, 
"Tom  Thumb,"  "De  Witt  Clinton,"  modern  steam  locomotive, 
electric  trains,  roadbeds,  tunnels  and  grades. 

Transportation,  Part  II.  15  min.  silent  film.  Man  as  beast  of 
burden,  evolution  of  the  wheel,  use  pf  animals,  early  and  later 
182 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 


steam  trains,  subways,  elevated,  early  automobile,  New  York 
street  scenes,  and  air  transportation. 

Transportation,  The  Story  of.  12  min.  silent  film.  Shows  Indian 
drags,  mule  trains,  stage  coaches,  horse-drawn  cars,  diagrams 
of  principle  of  early  steam  engines,  development  of  the  cylin- 
der and  sliding  valve,  wood-burning  river  boat,  and  the  prin- 
ciple of  the  gas  engine. 

The  Rocket,  an  historical  locomotive  important  in  the  early  devel- 
opment of  railroad  transportation. 


183 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
SCIENCES 

UNIT -COMMUNICATION 

IT'S  IN  THE  AIR 
THE  STORY.  This  is  the  story  of  the  greatest  system  of  mass 
communication  that  has  ever  been  devised.  Egbert  will  tell  in 
dramatic  form  some  of  the  steps  which  carried  communication 
from  the  point  where  it  was  necessary  to  have  wires  running 
from  place  to  place,  to  a  literal  broadcasting  of  messages  in  all 
directions  and  without  wires.  The  first  experiments  were  called 
wireless  telegraphy,  and  messages  were  sent  by  means  of 
sparks.  The  invention  of  the  vacuum  tube  made  it  possible  to 
transmit  and  receive  music  and  voice,  and  the  new  device 
came  to  be  known  as  the  wireless  telephone  or  the  radiophone 
—from  which  we  get  the  word  radio. 

SUGGESTED  MATERIALS  FOR  CLASSROOM  DEMONSTRATION 

If  possible,  obtain  an  old  crystal  set  and  ear  phones. 

Bring  in  vacuum  tubes  from  radio  (may  be  discarded  tubes, 

which  will  be  satisfactory  to  show  the  different  elements ) . 

Science  or  social  studies  textbook  of  vintage  of  1915  explaining 

about  "wireless"  and  another  of  1925  telling  about  the  birth  of 

broadcasting. 

Modern  "ads"  for  radio  or  television  sets. 

VOCABULARY  volumc  rectification  wave-length 

transmitter  audio-frequency  kilocycle  aerial 

microphone  radio-frequency  selectivity  ground 

amplifier  modulation  impulses  vacuum  tube 
184 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 

SUGGESTED  ACTIVITIES  BEFORE  THE  BROADCAST 

How  many  different  stations  can  you  tune  in  on  your  radio  set 

when  the  volume  is  lowest? 

How  many  can  you  tune  in  when  the  volume  is  highest?  Do 

you  have  a  tone  control  on  your  radio?  Listen  to  a  program  and 

observe  what  difference  this  adjustment  makes.  How  many 

tubes  are  in  your  radio? 

Have  a  "mock"  broadcast  in  the  classroom. 

WHAT  TO  LISTEN  FOR 

How  men  first  tried  to  send  radio  signals  through  space. 
How  your  voice  is  turned  into  "radio"  waves  and  then  back 
into  "sound"  waves  again;  or  what  happens  between  the  micro- 
phone and  the  classroom. 

The  steps  in  the  development  from  "spark"  signals  to  modern 
radio  broadcasting. 

SUGGESTED  ACTIVITIES  AFTER  THE  BROADCAST 

What  is  the  scientific  explanation  of  "560"  on  your  dial? 
Report  on  different  techniques  used  on  the  radio— e.g.  drama, 
interview,  monologues,  quizzes,  variety  show,  etc. 

Ask  any  student  who  has  broadcast  to  report  on  his  experi- 
ences. 

Ask  for  reports  of  visits  to  studios. 

Arrange  for  a  visit  to  WFIL  to  see  a  broadcast  of  "Science  is 
Fun";  or  a  visit  to  WFIL  to  see  studios  and  a  sound  effects 
demonstration. 

185 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
SCIENCES 

Have  students  tell  of  their  own  experiments  with  sound  effects. 
Organize  a  Radio  Club  if  there  is  not  one  in  the  school. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Peet,  Creighton.  All  About  Broadcasting.  Alfred  A.  Knopf, 
N.  Y.,  1942.  Pp.  67.  Written  for  children.  Well  illustrated. 
Floherty,  John  J.  On  the  Air.  The  Junior  Literary  Guild  and 
Doubleday,  Doran  &  Co.,  Inc.,  1937.  Pp.  99.  Another  well  illus- 
trated book  on  the  subject. 

A  school  Radio  Club  practices  for  a  broadcast.  Students  appearing 
on  a  radio  program  gain  a  deeper  appreciation  of  this- vital  means 
of  communication. 


186 


EXAMPLE    OF 
PROGRAM 

RELATED  FILMS 

Network  Broadcasting.  12  min.  sound  film.  Shows  how  modern 
network  radio  programs  are  sent  over  the  air  and  the  part  tele- 
phone circuits  play  in  making  them  possible.  May  be  used  to 
depict  the  number  of  employment  opportunities  available  in 
radio. 

News  in  the  Air.  20  min.  sound  film.  Describes  the  radio  as  a 
means  of  communication  and  dissemination  of  news.  Employs 
the  Panay  incident  as  a  typical  situation  from  the  time  the 
reporter  swims  from  the  sinking  vessel  until  the  news  is  broad- 
cast over  a  major  network. 

On  the  Air.  28  min.  sound  film.  Describes  how  radio  programs 
are  written,  built,  rehearsed,  timed  and  produced.  A  technical 
section  describes  "what  makes  radio  work." 

Television.  9  min.  sound  film.  Briefly  describes  the  parts  of  the 
television  receiver  and  transmitter.  Shows  the  televised  broad- 
cast of  a  horse  race  and  the  use  of  the  mobile  television  trans- 
mitter unit.  Shots  of  a  televised  studio  broadcast. 

The  two  programs  cited  are  merely  examples  of  what  may  be 
done  today  to  enrich  the  sciences  by  utilizing  many  different 
materials  of  instruction.  There  is  no  reason  why  similar  pro- 
grams cannot  be  planned  for  use  in  chemistry,  biology,  general 
science,  physics,  physiology  and  hygiene.  Lantern  slides,  illus- 
trating equipment,  apparatus  and  diagrams,  may  all  be  made 
by  pupils  and  used  as  part  of  the  demonstrations.  Filmstrips 

187 


ENRICHMENT    OF 
SCIENCES 


dealing  with  the  lives  and  contributions  to  science  of  eminent 
scientists  are  available  and  should  be  used  as  part  of  the  class 
studv. 

Although  the  programs  cited  call  attention  to  materials  to 
be  seen  in  a  great  museum  in  one  large  city,  programs  of  this 
type  may  be  used  in  any  schoolroom  today.  In  place  of  a  field 
trip  to  a  museum,  the  teacher  may  substitute  an  exhibit  of 
materials  borrowed  from  a  museum  or  other  educational  insti- 
tution. This  method  brings  the  museums  and  educational 
institutions  into  the  classroom  when  it  is  not  practical  for  the 
class  to  make  actual  field  trips  to  them.  Such  materials  should 
be  brought  into  the  classroom,  made  a  part  of  classroom  equip- 
ment, and  used  to  vitalize  and  enrich  discussion  periods  and 
laboratory  experiments. 


188 


XIII.  rianninQ 


tlie  Audio-Visual 


roe  ram 


AUDIO-VISUAL  ENRICHMENT  programs  are  ac- 
cepted today  as  a  valuable  method  of  teaching  and  integrating 
the  various  areas  in  the  curriculum.  Learning  wholly  through 
the  ears  by  means  of  the  spoken  word  has  always  been  recog- 
nized, although  it  has  often  resulted  in  "verbalism,"  a  mere 
hearing  of  words,  a  memorizing  of  informative  facts  without 
any  real  understanding  and  appreciation  of  their  meaning. 
When  boys  and  girls  "see"  as  well  as  "hear"  the  subject  con- 
tent, then  the  words  become  meaningful. 

Audio- visual  enrichment  programs  should  be  carefully  pre- 
pared with  a  full  understanding  of  the  content  and  aim  of  each 
aid,  the  reasons  for  its  use  and  combination  with  other  aids. 
For  each  visual  and  audio-visual  aid  has  a  particular  useful- 
ness and  advantage  which  is  often  intensified  by  combination 
with  other  aids.  The  teacher  who  plans  the  programs  should 
be  skilled  in  the  selection  and  combination  of  the  various  aids 
which  best  interpret  the  meaning  of  the  areas  presented. 
Often,  and  especially  with  younger  children,  there  is  the  need 
of  multi-sensory  appeal  through  eyes,  ears  and  fingers.  Stere- 
opticon  slides  might  fully  enrich  the  content  of  one  lesson, 
kodachrome  slides  might  be  the  best  selection  for  another— an 
art  program  for  example— whereas  a  combination  of  slides, 
films,  color  prints,  habitat  groups,  models,  dioramas  and  school 
trips  might  be  essential  for  enrichment  programs  integrating 
various  areas  in  the  curriculum. 

191 


PLANNING    THE 
AUDIO-VISUAL    PROGRAM 

It  is  for  the  teacher  to  decide  which  aids  and  combinations 
of  aids  are  to  be  used  with  the  objective  of  changing  the  cur- 
riculum from  stereotyped,  formal,  verbal  learning  in  unrelated 
areas,  to  vital,  human,  sensory  and  happy  learning  in  related 
areas.  Through  this  method,  opportunity  is  given  for  individ- 
ual thinking,  feeling  and  doing— instead  of  limiting  learning 
to  the  intellectual  activities  alone  which  were  formerly  of  the 
first  concern. 

INTEGRATION  WITH  THE  CURRICULUM.  Since 
no  subject  in  the  curriculum  should  be  taught  as  an  area  by 
itself,  but  rather  in  relation  to  other  areas,  integrated  programs 
are  important  in  presenting  this  relationship.  Visual  and  audio- 
visual aids  increase  the  interest  which  children  have  in  these 
various  areas  and  bring  home  to  them  their  close  relationship 
in  what  otherwise  might  be  abstract,  indefinite  experiences. 
Audio-visual  aids  substitute  concrete,  definite  experiences 
which  enrich  and  humanize  learning,  build  up  broader  back- 
grounds, and  make  the  content  of  each  area  meaningful,  con- 
necting it  with  real  life. 

All  will  agree  that  literature  should  not  be  "dissected"  but 
humanized.  By  means  of  audio-visual  aids,  children  are  ena- 
bled to  "live"  past  experiences  and  enjoy  new  ones  through  the 
sympathetic  sharing  of  the  experiences  of  the  characters  in 
stories  and  personalities  in  history  and  science.  Brain  and 
hand,  feeling  and  will,  become  active  in  vital  experiences 
through  audio-visual  enrichment,  which  not  only  shows  the 
192 


CURRICULUM 
BUDGET 

relation  of  various  areas  in  the  curriculum  one  to  another,  but 
the  contribution  each  has  to  offer  to  the  integrated  knowledge 
which  will  enrich  the  lives  of  our  boys  and  girls.  Critical  think- 
ing, individual  feeling  and  dynamic  doing  are  stimulated.  The 
desire  to  see  original  material  in  proper  settings  is  aroused, 
enabling  the  real  experience  to  become  the  learning  situation, 
and  thus  providing  functional  learning. 

Through  these  programs,  interest  which  has  been  created 
in  one  area  is  kindled,  also,  in  related  areas.  The  value  of  such 
integrated  programs,  with  appeal  through  seeing,  hearing, 
touching,  creating,  is  self-evident.  Such  presentations  enrich 
and  humanize  learning.  Audio-visual  programs  in  which  chil- 
dren take  an  active  part  in  research  and  creative  expression 
stimulate  an  even  greater  understanding  of  the  various  areas 
which  they  integrate  and  enrich. 

BUDGET.  The  extent  to  which  the  school  audio-visual  en- 
richment program  may  be  developed  depends  upon  the  school 
budget,  donations  from  parent  organizations,  and  returns  from 
school  entertainments,  "fairs,"  etc. 

Many  schools  are  without  these  facilities  and  must  base 
their  programs  upon  free  materials  which  are  available.  For- 
tunately there  are  both  educational  and  commercial  films  with- 
out fees— such  as  government  films  and  those  which  present, 
often  in  a  vivid,  educational  manner,  commercial  products. 
There  are  stereopticon  slides,  black  and  white  and  color  prints 
which  may  be  borrowed,  even  habitat  groups,  dioramas  and 

193 


PLANNING    THE 
AUDIO-VISUAL    PROGRAM 

unit  materials.*  These  aids  enable  programs  to  be  presented 
although  lack  of  funds  may  limit  their  scope  and  hinder  the 
realization  of  ideals. 

Some  schools  are  fortunate  in  receiving  financial  help  from 
their  Parent  Associations.  Hunter  College  Elementary  School 
in  New^  York  City  is  unique  since  it  not  only  has  the  budget  for 
audio-visual  enrichment  programs  provided  by  its  Parent  As- 
sociation, but  also  receives  the  services  of  an  active  and  ef- 
fective parent  committee.  The  members  of  this  Audio- Visual 
Enrichment  Committee  procure  the  materials,  help  in  operat- 
ing machines  and  arrange  bulletin  boards.  A  teacher  commit- 
tee also  cooperates  with  the  Chairman  of  Audio- Visual  En- 
richment. 

CLASSROOM  PREPARATION.  Teaching  programs  in 
most  subjects  are  carried  out  in  classrooms.  It  should  be  kept 
in  mind  that  the  classroom  is  the  frame  or  setting  for  a  pro- 
gram. This  setting  should  be  properly  arranged  if  good  results 
are  to  be  achieved.  Good  films,  slides,  pictures  or  maps  are  of 
little  help  if  they  are  poorly  and  improperly  used  and  dis- 
played in  the  classroom. 

The  first  item  to  be  checked  is  equipment  for  projection.  If 
it  is  necessary  to  project  in  a  darkened  room,  proper  window 
curtains  or  shades  should  be  provided,  so  that  maximum  bril- 
liance and  clearness  are  achieved.  Projector  and  screen  should 
be  set  up  and  checked  before  the  class  convenes.  Last-minute 

*  See  Chapter  XVI,  "Where  to  Obtain  Help." 

194 


CLASSROOM 
PREPARATION 

adjustments  distract  the  attention  of  the  children  and  also  take 
time  that  might  better  be  spent  in  presentation  of  the  lesson. 
If  anything  is  wrong  with  the  projector,  or  if  repairs  are  neces- 
sary, they  should  be  attended  to  before  the  class  period  in 
which  the  projector  is  to  be  used. 

If  flat  prints,  dolls,  objects,  maps  or  other  aids  are  to  be  used, 
they  should  be  set  out  on  shelves  or  bulletin-display  boards 
before  the  lesson  starts.  All  materials  that  are  to  be  used  for 
a  particular  lesson  should  be  taken  out  of  cupboards  and  so 
placed  that  they  are  accessible  when  needed.  Time  spent  in 
hurried  searching  for  some  item  is  class  time  wasted. 

A  special  room  devoted  to  audio-visual  aids  is  highly  desirable.  A 
teacher  should  be  in  charge  to  advise  and  assist  in  the  presentation 
and  procurement  of  aids  needed  in  the  classrooms. 


195 


PLANNING    THE 
AUDIO-VISUAL    PROGRAM 


TEACHING  AIDS.  Wherever  possible,  teaching  aids 
should  be  displayed  in  the  classroom  for  a  long  enough  period 
of  time  for  the  children  to  become  familiar  with  them.  They 
should  also  be  displayed  in  an  attractive  arrangement.  Mod- 
em advertising  display  techniques  might  well  be  utilized  in 
order  to  catch  and  hold  the  attention  of  pupils.  The  amount 
of  material  on  display  at  any  one  tin^  depends  upon  how  much 
material  is  needed  and  also  upon  how  much  the  teacher  feels 
it  wise  to  display  for  any  one  lesson.  This  is  a  matter  which 
varies  according  to  the  subject,  the  amount  of  material  avail- 
able, the  need  for  supplementary  teaching  aids,  the  quality 
of  material  available,  and  the  intelligence  level  of  the  class. 
One  picture,  effectively  displayed,  may  be  better  at  one  time 
than  a  series  of  pictures.  At  another  time  a  series  of  related 
pictures  may  be  needed  to  illustrate  and  clarify  some  topic 
that  has  baffled  and  dismayed  another  group. 

Even  though  a  school  has  a  center  for  the  storage,  care  and 
distribution  of  teaching  aids,  each  teacher  should  have  mate- 
rials in  her  own  room  which  are  directly  related  to  the  subject 
she  teaches.  This  collection,  which  may  consist  of  pictures, 
maps,  clippings,  posters  or  pamphlets,  will  enable  her  to  have 
an  ever-ready  source  of  supplementary  material  upon  which 
to  draw.  Then,  when  additional  aids,  such  as  motion  pictures, 
lantern  slides,  filmstrips,  dolls,  etc.,  are  needed,  they  may  be 
secured  from  the  general  school  collection.  If  the  children 
bring  to  school  clippings  and  other  material,  both  the  class- 
room collection  and  pupil  interest  will  be  increased. 
196 


AUDIO-VISUAL 
ROOM 

THE  AUDIO-VISUAL  ROOM.  The  question  of  whether 
or  not  it  is  advisable  to  set  aside  a  separate  room  for  the  audio- 
visual program  is  one  which  depends  upon  the  school  layout 
and  construction,  the  school  budget  and  the  teaching  program. 
The  ideal  situation  would  be  to  have  each  classroom  provided 
with  equipment  for  the  showing  of  motion  pictures  and  slides, 
and  sufficient  cupboard  space  to  have  the  other  aids  kept  in 
readiness.  This,  however,  involves  an  expenditure  of  money 
not  possible  for  the  average  school.  The  best,  practical  situa- 
tion would  be  to  have  an  audio-visual  room  on  each  floor  of  the 
school  building. 

One  practical  solution  to  the  problem  is  to  have  one  room  in 
which  all  projection  equipment  is  set  up  and  kept  in  readiness 
for  use  at  all  times,  and  to  take  classes  to  this  room  when  audio- 
visual aids  are  to  be  used.  If  this  plan  is  followed,  one  teacher 
should  be  in  charge  of  the  room  and  a  definite  time  schedule 
arranged  for  its  use.  If  the  teacher  assigned  to  be  in  charge  of 
the  audio-visual  room  is  also  to  plan  the  audio-visual  program 
for  classes  using  the  facilities  of  the  room,  she  should  not  be 
expected  to  carry  a  full  teaching  schedule  of  other  subjects. 
The  successful  planning  and  carrying  out  of  an  effective  audio- 
visual enrichment  program  is  a  full-time  assignment  in  itself. 

The  room  selected  should  have  good  acoustical  properties 
in  order  that  sound  motion  pictures  and  recordings  may  be 
used  to  full  advantage.  Poor  sound  effects  are  as  much  a  hin- 
drance to  good  teaching  as  poor  films.  The  room  should  be  cen- 
trally located  and  easily  accessible  to  classes  from  all  parts  of 

197 


PLANNING    THE 
AUDIO-VISUAL    PROGRAM 

the  building.  The  windows  should  be  equipped  with  heavy 
curtains  or  shades  so  that  the  room  may  be  darkened  suffi- 
ciently to  insure  good  projection.  A  roll  screen  mounted  on  the 
wall,  or  a  standing  screen  should  be  in  readiness  at  all  times. 
The  projector  to  be  used,  whether  motion  picture,  filmstrip, 
or  lantern  slide,  should  be  set  up  and  focused  before  the  class 
arrives.  If  the  class  teacher  is  to  be  the  projectionist,  she 
should  have  the  films  or  slides  in  order  for  insertion  in  the 
machine.  When  sound  materials  are  to  be  used,  the  sound 
speaker  should  be  connected.  If  a  student  projectionist  or  the 
audio-visual  aid  teacher  is  to  be  projectionist,  these  same  de- 
tails should  be  checked  before  each  class  arrives. 


A  portable  projector  for  2  x  2  inch  slides  and  a  microphone  con- 
nected to  a  loudspeaker  are  convenient  if  the  auditorium  is  not 
equipped  with  a  projection  booth. 


AUDITORIUM 
PROGRAM 

The  audio-visual  room  should  be  large  enough  to  accommo- 
date at  least  two  classes.  It  is  often  wise  to  show  motion  pic- 
tures to  more  than  one  class  at  a  time.  When  a  guest  speaker 
is  present,  several  classes  may  be  brought  together  for  the 
program.  For  good  audio- visual  enrichment  programs,  the 
room  devoted  to  these  programs  should  be  carefully  planned 
and  equipped.  Then  the  program  will  be  carried  out  in  such  a 
way  that  it  becomes  part  of  the  whole  teaching  schedule,  in- 
stead of  being  an  afterthought. 

AUDIO-VISUAL  PROGRAMS  IN  THE  AUDITO- 
RIUM. Every  school  auditorium  should  be  equipped  with 
facilities  for  showing  any  and  all  of  the  types  of  materials 
already  mentioned.  Assembly  progiams  should  be  enriched 
by  the  showing  of  motion  pictures;  guest  speakers  should  be 
asked  to  give  illustrated  talks;  students  should  be  encouraged 
to  use  these  aids  in  presenting  their  own  speeches  or  plays. 

One  thing  to  be  avoided,  however,  is  the  use  of  the  audito- 
rium as  the  audio-visual  room.  If  this  plan  is  followed,  it  is 
likely  to  mean  that  motion  pictures  are  shown  to  large  groups 
of  students,  regardless  of  whether  or  not  the  pictures  are  ap- 
plicable to  the  needs  of  all  or  only  part  of  the  group.  Students 
soon  come  to  regard  such  motion  picture  showings  merely  as 
entertainment.  When  this  occurs,  no  great  gain  will  come  from 
the  use  of  even  the  very  best  teaching  films,  and  mediocre 
films  will  be  of  still  less  value. 

The  well-planned  assembly  program  should  be  one  part  of 

199 


PLANNING    THE 
AUDIO-VISUAL    PROGRAM 


the  complete  audio- visual  enrichment  program.  If  a  class  has 
been  successful  in  the  preparation  of  a  good  play,  puppet  show 
or  radio-script,  these  will  often  prove  of  benefit  to  the  whole 
school  when  given  as  an  assembly  presentation.  But  the  audi- 
torium is  not  the  place  for  the  successful  carrying  out  of  audio- 
visual programs  planned  for  individual  class  work. 


EQUIPMENT  FOR  DISPLAY.  The  audio-visual  room 
should  be  provided  with  sufiicient  space  and  equipment  for 
proper  display  of  the  diflFerent  types  of  teaching  aids.  Modern 
bulletin  boards  may  be  purchased,  or  made  in  the  school  shops. 
It  is  essential  that  such  display  boards  be  provided  for  the 
arrangement  of  flat  pictures,  maps  and  prints.  Materials  of  this 
type  often  lose  their  effectiveness  if  poorly  displayed  or 
crowded  into  a  small  area.  It  is  sometimes  a  good  plan  to  have 
blackboard  and  display  board  sections  alternating  around  two 
sides  of  the  room.  This  makes  it  possible  to  show  pictorial 
materials  while  still  providing  adequate  space  for  blackboard 
work. 

Display  cabinets  with  glass  doors  should  be  provided  for 
objects  which  must  be  kept  locked  up  or  behind  glass.  A  good 
type  of  cabinet  is  one  with  glass-doored  shelves  in  the  upper 
section  and  storage  cupboard  space  in  the  lower  section.  Open 
shelf  space  should  also  be  provided  for  materials  which  may 
safely  be  displayed  in  this  way  and  for  books,  pictures,  pottery 
and  other  objects.  Whatever  the  type  of  cabinet,  ample  space 
200 


SPECIAL 
EXHIBITIONS 


should  be  provided  so  that  many  types  of  materials  may  be 
displayed  and  made  available  to  the  students. 

SPECIAL  EXHIBITIONS.  The  ingenious  audio-visual 
teacher  will  try  to  change  the  exhibits  on  display  frequently 
enough  to  keep  student  interest  alive.  Special  exhibitions 
should  be  planned  for  the  different  holiday  periods,  for  spe- 
cial lessons,  for  open-school  week,  for  parent-teacher  associa- 
tion meetings,  and  for  many  other  occasions.  These  exhibits 
should  not  always  be  arranged  by  the  same  group  of  students, 
but  all  students  should  be  encouraged  to  assist  in  the  prepara- 
tion and  setting  up  of  such  displays.  Students  should  be 
encouraged  to  bring  in  material  from  home  for  temporary 
exhibits;  friends  should  be  invited  to  lend  materials  they  have 
collected  on  trips  to  foreign  countries;  the  entire  teaching  staff 
of  the  school  should  be  invited  to  contribute  objects  for  special 
exhibits;  hobby  and  craft  exhibits  should  be  held,  both  for 
students  and  teachers.  The  arrangement  of  a  special  exhibit 
will  often  be  found  the  means  of  arousing  interest  in  some 
topic  which  would  otherwise  have  made  a  mere  routine  lesson. 


201 


CREATIVE  ACHIEVEMENTS  cannot  be  measured  by 
laboratory  tests.  They  are  individual,  often  intangible,  and 
usually  progressive. 

Perhaps  the  understanding  and  appreciation  of  the  w^onders 
of  the  world  in  science  and  art,  the  comprehension  of  world 
rather  than  national  history  and  culture,  the  vision  of  world 
citizenship  of  tomorrow  in  a  world  where  time  and  space  have 
been  conquered,  are  not  the  least  of  these  results.  Audio-visual 
aids  can  accomplish  economically,  effectively,  and  happily 
what  only  world  travel  can  in  relation  to  education  on  a  world 
basis.  They  enable  our  boys  and  girls  to  participate  in  what 
seems  to  them  actual  reality  of  experience,  so  vital  may  be  the 
use  of  these  aids  by  those  who  realize  their  power  and  know 
how  to  make  use  of  it. 

History  ceases  to  be  lessons  of  dates,  names,  events  and 
places  to  be  learned  and  soon  forgotten.  It  comes  to  life 
through  pictures  of  episodes  and  people,  for  "makers  of  pic- 
tures," whether  they  are  painters  of  pictures  or  motion  picture 
directors  who  often  seek  the  help  of  the  former,  are  able  to 
present  the  scene  as  a  whole  rather  than  unfold  it  a  bit  at  a 
time  as  historians  must  do  in  words.  History  and  geography 
fit  together  like  adjacent  parts  of  a  puzzle  when  audio-visual 
materials  bring  out  the  dependence  of  history  upon  environ- 
ment. Literature  and  science,  art,  arts  and  crafts,  and  music- 
all  fall  into  place  as  vivid,  integrated  programs,  made  possible 
by  the  skillful  selection  and  combination  of  these  aids. 

203 


CREATIVE 
ACHIEVEMENTS 

Art  and  music,  drama  and  the  dance,  belong  to  all  of  us, 
and  are  a  part  of  our  lives,  whatever  our  country,  race,  religion 
or  language  may  be.  Through  multi-sensory  aids,  the  wonder  of 
this  realization  enters  the  minds  and  hearts  of  the  students.  It 
makes  them  true  creators,  for  they  realize  that  there  is  no  class 
or  rank  in  this  cultural  heritage,  that  the  message  given  can 
be  understood  by  all. 

A  special  Library  Corner  can  be  set  aside  in  any  classroom  where 
visual  aids  in  the  development  of  the  language  arts  program  can 
be  displayed. 


INFLUENCE    ON 
CHARACTER 

Boys  and  girls  grow  in  comprehension  of  the  knowledge 
that  the  arts  are  everywhere,  and  that  the  enjoyment  of  them 
belongs  to  rich  and  poor  alike. 

Robert  W.  de  Forest,  former  president  of  the  Metropolitan 
Museum  of  Art,  and  donor  with  Mrs.  de  Forest,  of  the  Amer- 
ican Wing  which  has  contributed  much  to  the  humanizing  of 
art  and  history,  often  told  audiences  of  children  in  the 
museum's  illustrated  and  integrated  story  programs,  that  they 
were  part  owners  of  the  gallery  treasures  because  they  were 
able  to  enjoy  them. 

Audio-visual,  integrated  programs  encourage  children  in 
their  creativeness.  They  bring  forth  the  idea,  which  to  some 
children  comes  as  a  surprise,  that  creative  ability  may  belong 
to  the  very  poor  as  well  as  to  those  endowed  with  wealth.  It 
is  a  wonderful  idea  which  stimulates  inventiveness  and  orig- 
inality in  words  both  spoken  and  written,  in  both  prose  and 
poetry,  in  scientific  experiments,  in  original  music,  and  in 
artistic  endeavors  through  various  media— clay,  crayon,  chalk, 
paint,  dioramas,  models,  etc.  These  common  cultural  lan- 
guages which  they  have  come  to  understand  produce  critical 
thinking,^  individual  feeling,  and  creative  contributions. 

INFLUENCE  ON  CHARACTER.  The  understanding 
and  enjoyment  of  world  achievements  which  come  through 
these  programs,  often  stimulate  ideals  and  develop  character. 
A  boy  in  one  of  New  York  City's  large  junior  high  schools,  a 
problem  in  behavior,  through  his  attendance  at  the  museum's 

205 


CREATIVE 
ACHIEVEMENTS 

illustrated  story -hour  programs  which  vitalized  art  and  inte- 
grated it  with  history,  geography,  and  music,  became  so 
interested  in  the  museum's  treasures,  that  he  gave  up  his  ques- 
tionable street  activities  on  Sundays,  and  visited  the  museum 
each  week,  instead.  His  work  improved  in  school  to  the  satis- 
faction of  his  teachers,  and  he  helped  his  mother  with  money 
he  earned  on  a  job  after  school  to  which  he  was  surprisingly 
faithful.  He  became  a  cooperative  citizen,  offering  his  serv- 

A  giant  meteor  from  outer  space  has  multi-sensory  appeal  for  these 
children  visiting  the  Hayden  Planetarium  (New  York). 


206 


TRAINING    FOR 
SELF-MANAGEMENT 

ices  as  a  story  hour  "Knight"  each  Sunday.  He  made  a  real 
contribution  to  his  community. 

If  parents  can  be  encouraged  to  take  children  on  visits  to 
places  of  interest  they  will  be  helping  the  teachers  in  the  effort 
to  make  children  visualize  and  appreciate  the  world  in  which 
they  live.  Parents'  organizations  often  make  this  a  part  of  their 
own  program.  Members  of  one  such  group  visited  the  Amer- 
ican Museum  of  Natural  History  as  a  part  of  their  parent  train- 
ing program,  and  their  reaction  was  expressed  by  one  parent 
who  said,  "We  took  this  excursion  so  that  we  could  introduce 
these  mothers  to  one  of  the  finest  educational  opportunities 
in  our  city.  We  did  this,  not  only  for  their  edification,  but  so 
that  they  would  interest  members  of  their  families  (husbands 
and  older  children )  and  their  neighbors.  We  had  ample  evi- 
dence that  this  was  achieved.  Some  said  they  could  hardly 
wait  for  the  week-end  so  that  they  could  return  with  older 
children."  Another  group  said  they  would  not  be  satisfied  until 
all  the  mothers  in  the  school  had  been  there  and  so  they  were 
going  back  to  organize  another  visiting  group. 

TRAINING  FOR  SELF-MANAGEMENT.  The  train- 
ing of  boys  and  girls  to  serve  as  projectionists  and  assistants  to 
the  teacher  in  charge  of  visual  instruction  can  be  made  a 
valuable  experience  for  these  students.  At  one  school  in  up- 
state New  York  all  projection  is  taken  care  of  by  the  Student 
Projection  Squad.  Boys  and  girls  are  chosen  for  this  squad 
by  means  of  mechanical  aptitude  tests  at  the  start  of  each 

207 


CREATIVE 
ACHIEVEMENTS 

school  year.  *  In  this  way  students  are  secured  who  have  defi- 
nite aptitude  for  this  type  of  work  and  an  esprit  de  corps  is 
estabhshed  which  is  invaluable.  The  students  thus  selected 
are  given  a  training  course  by  the  teacher  in  charge  of  visual 
instruction.  It  has  been  found  wise  not  to  draw  upon  students 
below  the  eighth  grade.  The  members  of  the  squad  thus 
formed  and  trained  are  designated  as  Certified  Operators, 
under  direction  of  a  Student  Manager.  All  details,  such  as 
checking  equipment,  checking  program  of  visual  aids  to  be 
supplied  to  various  teachers  and  assigning  of  projectionists,  are 
carried  out  by  this  squad. 

As  a  result  of  using  the  services  of  a  well-trained  student 
squad,  the  following  goals  have  been  achieved  in  this  school: 

1.  Economical  operation  of  the  visual  instruction  program  for 
the  entire  school. 

2.  Training  of  students  in  mature  human  relation  contacts  and 
work  responsibility. 

This  program  has  virtually  added  a  new  course  to  the  school 
curriculum,  namely,  a  course  in  responsible  self -management. 
Moreover,  the  student  has  been  given  a  powerful  new  learning 
medium  both  for  his  own  training  and  for  the  training  of  his 
f  ellow-students.  t 

*  Three  standardized  tests  have  been  found  to  be  excellent:  ( 1)  O'Rourke's 
"Mechanical  Aptitudes  Test",  (2)  Mellenbruch,  Form  A,  and  (3)  Re\ised 
Minnesota  Form  Board  Test,  Series  A. 

^  The  program  described  is  in  operation  at  the  Roelif  Jansen  Central  School, 
Hillsdale,  New  York,  under  the  direction  and  supervision  of  Mr.  George 
Colclough,  Director  of  Visual  Instruction  at  the  school.  Mr.  Colclougli's  com- 
plete program  is  described  by  him  in  "Let's  Build  That  Bridge,"  Educational 
Screen,  1946. 

208 


SKILLS    AND 
CRAFTSMANSHIP 

SKILLS  AND  CRAFTSMANSHIP.  When  students  have 
been  given  an  opportunity  to  see  works  of  art  and  examples 
of  skilled  craftsmanship,  they  gradually  become  aware  of  the 
fact  that  they  themselves  can  make  these  experiences  part  of 
their  own  lives.  In  the  Red  Bank,  New  Jersey,  High  School,  a 
recent  project  proved  the  practical  value  of  training  students, 
through  visual  methods,  to  create  their  own  works  of  art. 
The  art  instructor  departed  from  the  usual  practice  of  paint- 
ing pictures,  designs,  posters,  etc.,  and  inaugurated  a  project 
of  repainting  and    redecorating   old   furniture.      She    had 

High  school  students  of  Red  Bank,  New  Jersey,  show  skilled  crafts- 
manship in  decorating  old  furniture. 


209 


CREATIVE 
ACHIEVEMENTS 


worked  with  Peter  Hunt,  popular  decorator,  whose  furniture 
and  European  peasant  designs  have  proved  so  popular.  The 
designs  were  so  colorful  and  appealing  that  she  saw  in  this 
branch  of  art  an  opportunity  to  give  her  students  the  experi- 
ence of  actually  decorating  and  refinishing  a  piece  of  furni- 
ture and  at  the  same  time  producing  a  beautiful  example  of 
design  work.* 

The  entire  story  of  color  and  design  was  carefully  reviewed. 
Many  pictures  and  magazine  clippings  of  furniture  and  in- 
teriors were  studied  and  discussed.  Actual  and  "imagined" 
plans  for  homes,  color  schemes,  and  furnishings  were  thor- 
oughly examined.  Each  student  was  then  permitted  to  bring 
into  the  classroom  a  chair,  a  small  table,  radio  cabinet  or  the 
like,  on  which  he  could  work  and  which  was  his  to  take  home 
when  finished.  Generally  speaking,  only  a  small  proportion 
of  the  classroom  results  were  of  exhibit  standard.  However, 
regardless  of  the  student's  skill,  even  those  below  average 
learned  to  produce  a  finished  product  in  this  furniture  line. 

Close  correlation  of  all  past  work  was  maintained  and  the 
project  became  the  tangible  evidence  of  the  value  of  a  mass 
of  accumulated  knowledge.  The  students  drew  upon  a  knowl- 
edge of  the  characteristics  of  paints;  they  learned  how  to  mix 
and  prepare  paints;  how  to  clean,  scrape,  sandpaper,  and  re- 
vamp old  furniture;  how  to  apply  the  new  paint  and  the  design 
and  finally  how  to  "antique"  the  finished  product. 

*  This  project  was  conceived  and  carried  out  by  Mrs.  Frances  A.  Moore,  Art 
Instructor  at  the  Red  Bank,  New  Jersey,  High  School,  during  1945-1946. 

210 


SKILLS    AND 
CRAFTSMANSHIP 


Creative  work  of  this  type  takes  art  out  of  the  classroom  and 
places  it  in  the  home  and  in  the  community.  It  also  proves  to 
students  that  artistic  skill  and  craftsmanship  are  not  reserved 
for  the  creators  of  museum  pieces  but  are  abilities  that  may 
be  acquired  in  some  degree  by  anyone.  Students  hitherto 
totally  disinterested  in  decorating  or  painting  took  a  keen  in- 
terest in  these  subjects  when  they  saw  the  practical  applica- 
tion to  objects  that  were  part  of  home  and  everyday  life. 

The  influence  of  the  popular  decorator,  Peter  Hunt,  is  shown  in  this 
old  dresser,  redecorated  by  high  school  students  at  Red  Bank. 


#1 

m 

.ft 

U 

j» 

■  H 

f"   'm 

r 

i    * 
i.1 

211 


XV.  Teacher  Education 


DO  EDUCATORS  of  today  consider  seriously  enough  the 
responsibihty  of  teacher  education  institutions  to  acquaint  stu- 
dents about  to  go  out  into  schools  as  teachers  with  the  impor- 
tance of  audio-visual  aids  and  their  effectiveness  in  teaching?  * 

More  and  more  schools  throughout  the  country  are  making 
use  of  the  equipment  and  materials  now  more  generally  avail- 
able. Student  teachers  should  start  their  teaching  experience 
with  full  knowledge  of  what  audio-visual  enrichment  means, 
its  dynamic  influence  upon  the  curriculum  and  upon  world 
understanding. 

They  should  be  acquainted  with  the  techniques  and  skills, 
with  the  sources  of  equipment  and  materials  of  this  vital 
method  of  teaching,  with  its  power  as  a  means  of  integration 
with  various  areas  in  the  curriculum. 

The  misuse  of  audio-visual  aids  must  be  made  clear  to  these 
new  teachers  in  order  to  afford  a  better  understanding  of  their 
proper  use.  Many  teachers  already  in  schools,  often  with  years 
of  experience,  have  the  impression  that  audio-visual  enrich- 
ment means,  literally,  the  mere  showing  in  classroom  or 
auditorium  of  many  audio-visual  aids— flat  pictures,  slides, 
filmstrips,  dioramas,  etc.  New  and  inexperienced  teachers 
need  to  realize,  through  required  courses  which  are  a  definite 
part  of  their  teacher-training,  that  this  way  of  presenting 

*  This  chapter  is  offered  as  a  possible  guide  for  training  student  teacher  classes 
in  the  use  of  audio-visual  materials  and  equipment.  It  is  an  outline  for  course 
work  in  this  field. 

213 


TEACHER 
EDUCATION 

audio-visual  aids  is  not  genuine  audio- visual  enrichment. 
These  courses  must  demonstrate,  through  an  understanding 
of  the  philosophy  and  educational  principles  involved,  through 
concrete  examples  of  programs  which  show  the  proper  and 
eflFective  use  of  these  materials,  that  audio-visual  enrichment 
of  the  curriculum  includes: 

1.  An  understanding  of  the  various  sensory  materials  avail- 
able, and  their  sources. 

2.  The  realization  that  an  eflFective  use  of  these  materials 
necessitates  intelligent  research,  selection,  evaluation,  elimi- 
nation and  combination  of  the  aids  and  the  harmonious  rela- 
tionship of  one  aid  to  another. 

3.  A  conviction  that  audio-visual  enrichment  is  not  a  sepa- 
rate subject  but  a  teaching  method  applicable  to  any  and  all 
areas  in  the  curriculum.  They  should  realize  that  it  results  in 
economical,  vital  and  happy  learning. 

4.  Understanding  of  the  interdependence  of  the  various 
curriculum  areas  which  these  aids  integrate,  and  their  cultural 
significance. 

5.  The  need  of  a  specialist  to  teach  and  demonstrate  the  vital 
use  of  these  materials. 

6.  A  basic  development  of  operational  skills. 

7.  The  realization  that  these  aids  will  never  take  the  place  of 
teachers  but  will  greatly  aid  in  vivid,  happy  learning  experi- 
ences which  approximate  reality— that  they  supplement  teach- 
ing. 

214 


TEACHER 
EDUCATION 

During  the  course  there  should  be  an  opportunity,  in 
laboratory  periods,  for  each  of  the  students  to  give  an  audio- 
visual integrated  program  of  his  or  her  own  planning,  in  which 
the  principles  and  techniques  presented  in  the  course  are 
demonstrated  in  regular  classroom  procedures  so  far  as  pos- 
sible.* 

Reports,  evaluations  of  audio-visual  aids,  constructive  criti- 
cisms of  programs  and  free  discussions  would  be  important 
factors  of  the  course,  as  vital  as  the  lectures,  demonstrations 
and  laboratory  periods.  Group  conferences,  also,  would  be 
helpful  among  the  specialists  and  the  student  teachers  and, 
whenever  possible,  with  children  who  have  been  in  the  demon- 
stration audiences,  for  their  reactions  are  important. 

TOPICS   TO  BE  INCLUDED   IN  TEACHER  EDUCATION  COURSE  IN 
SELECTION  AND  USE  OF  AUDIO-VISUAL  MATERIALS 

1.  Philosophy  underlying  effective  utilization  of  audio-visual 
materials. 

2.  How  to  plan  and  organize  an  effective  audio- visual  teach- 
ing program. 

3.  How  to  plan  and  organize  the  audio- visual  instruction 
room. 

4.  Enrichment  of  social  studies  through  audio-visual  aids. 

5.  Enrichment  of  language  arts  through  audio-visual  aids. 

6.  Enrichment  of  the  sciences  through  audio-visual  aids. 

*  This  is  being  done  in  workshops  in  the  Hunter  College  Education  Depart- 
ment and  in  the  School  of  Education,  New  York  University. 

215 


TEACHER 
EDUCATION 

7.  How  to  organize  and  arrange  classroom  and  school  mu- 
seums and  exhibits. 

8.  Sources  for  audio-visual  materials  and  equipment. 

9.  How  to  operate  various  types  of  projection  equipment. 

a.  Demonstrations  by  instructor. 

b.  Operation  by  students. 

10.  Motion  Pictures. 

a.  Discussions  of  techniques  for  using  motion  pictures. 

b.  Demonstrations  of  use  of  motion  pictures  in  actual  class- 
room situations. 

c.  Evaluation  of  motion  pictures  available  for  school  use. 

d.  Production  of  school  pupil-made  motion  pictures. 

11.  Photography  and  Camera  Clubs,  Flat  Pictures. 

a.  Techniques  for  use  of  photographs  and  pictures. 

b.  How  to  organize  and  conduct  a  school  camera  club. 

12.  Lantern  Slides. 

a.  Discussions  of  techniques  for  utilization  of  lantern  slides. 

b.  How  to  make  standard  size  and  miniature  lantern  slides. 

c.  Demonstration  of  use  of  lantern  slides  in  actual  classroom 
situations. 

13.  Filmstrips. 

a.  Discussion  of  techniques  for  utilization  of  filmstrips. 

b.  How  to  make  filmstrips. 

c.  Demonstration  of  use  of  filmstrips  in  actual  classroom 
situations. 

216 


TEACHER 
EDUCATION 

14.  Dioramas. 

a.  How  to  make  dioramas. 

b.  Demonstration  of  ways  of  using  dioramas  in  actual  class- 
room situations. 

15.  Maps,  Charts  and  Globes. 

a.  Discussion  of  techniques  for  use  of  maps,  charts  and 
globes. 

b.  Demonstration  of  effective  utilization  of  maps,  charts,  and 
globes. 

16.  Radio,  Television,  Recordings. 

a.  Discussion  of  techniques  for  utilization  of  radio,  tele- 
vision, and  recordings. 

b.  Production  and  presentation  of  programs  using  these  ma- 
terials. 

17.  Training  the  Student  Visual- Aid  Staff. 

a.  How  to  organize  and  train  a  student  visual-aid  staff.' 

b.  Role  of  student  visual-aid  staff  in  audio-visual  program  of 
school. 

18.  Criteria  and  Standards  for  Selection  and  Use  of  Audio- 
Visual  Materials. 

a.  Discussion  of  criteria  and  standards  applicable  to  vari- 
ous types  of  materials. 

b.  Formulation  of  criteria  and  standards  for  selection  and 
use  of  audio- visual  materials. 


217 


XVI.  Where  to  Obtain  Help 


4 


■~V. 


^^lil 


AUDIO-VISUAL  AIDS   DISTRIBUTION   CENTERS- 
STATE  AND  REGIONAL 

ALABAMA 

Superintendent  of  Visual  Aids,  University  of  Alabama,  University. 

ARIZONA 

Director  of  Extension,  University  of  Arizona,  Tucson. 

ARKANSAS 

Director,  Department  of  Public  Relations,  Arkansas  State  Teachers 
College,  Normal  Station,  Conway. 

CALIFORNIA 

Extension  Division,  University  of  California,  Berkeley. 
Extension  Division,  University  of  California,  Los  Angeles. 
Visual  Aids  Supervisor,  Department  of  Education,  Los  Angeles. 
Director  of  Visual  Education,  Stockton  Junior  College,  Stockton. 
Visual  Education  Department,  Mendocino  County  Schools,  Ukiah. 

COLORADO 

Director,  Bureau  of  Visual  Instruction,  University  of  Colorado, 

Boulder. 
Director,  Film  Center,  University  of  Denver,  Denver. 
Colorado  State  College  of  Education,  Greeley. 

CONNECTICUT 

Director,  Audio- Visual  Aids  Center,  University  of  Connecticut, 
Storrs. 

FLORIDA 

Department  of  Audio- Visual  Instruction,  University  of  Florida, 
Gainesville. 

GEORGIA 

General  Extension  Service,  University  System  of  Georgia,  Atlanta. 

219 


WHERE    TO 
OBTAIN    HELP 

HAWAII 

University  Extension  Division,  University  of  Hawaii,  Honolulu. 

IDAHO 

Assistant  Extension  Editor,  Extension  Service,  University  of  Idaho, 

Boise. 
Director,    University   Educational    Film    Service,   University   of 

Idaho,  Southern  Branch,  Pocatello. 

ILLINOIS 

Director,  Film  Library,  Southern  Illinois  Normal  University,  Car- 
bondale. 
Supervisor  of  Visual  Aids,  University  of  Illinois,  Champaign. 

INDIANA 

Consultant,  Bureau  of  Audio- Visual  Aids,  Indiana  University, 
Bloomington. 

Director,  Teaching  Materials  Service,  Ball  State  Teachers  Col- 
lege, Muncie. 

Director  of  Extension,  Indiana  State  Teachers  College,  Terre 
Haute. 

IOWA 

Director,  Visual  Instruction  Service,  Iowa  State  College,  Ames. 
Department  of  Visual  Instruction,  University  of  Iowa,  Iowa  City. 

KANSAS 

Director,  Extension  Division,  Kansas  State  College,  Fort  Hays. 
Bureau  of  Visual  Instruction,  Extension  Division,  University  of 
Kansas,  Lawrence. 

KENTUCKY 

Audio-Visual  Aids  Department,  University  of  Kentucky,  Lexing- 
ton. 

LOUISIANA 

Department  of  Visual  Instruction,  State  Department  of  Educa- 
tion, Baton  Rouge. 
General  Extension  Service,  Louisiana  State  University,  University. 

220 


DISTRIBUTION 
CENTERS 

MAINE 

Dean,  School  of  Education,  University  of  Maine,.  Orono. 

MARYLAND 

Maryland  Academy  of  Sciences,  Baltimore. 

MASSACHUSETTS 

Director  of  Visual  Instruction,  State  Department  of  Education, 

Boston. 
Director,  Division  of  Teaching  Aids,  Boston  University,  Boston. 
Director,  Harvard  Film  Service,  Harvard  University,  Cambridge. 

MICHIGAN 

Director,  Visual  Education,  University  of  Michigan,  Ann  Arbor. 
Assistant  Extension  Editor,  Information  Service,  Michigan  State 

College,  East  Lansing. 
Director  of  Extension,  Central  Michigan  College  of  Education,  Mt. 

Pleasant. 

MINNESOTA 

Director,  Visual  Education,  Extension  Division,  University  of 
Minnesota,  Minneapolis  14. 

MISSOURI 

Visual  Education  Service,  Extension  Division,  University  of  Mis- 
souri, Columbia. 

MONTANA 

Director  of  Publications,  Extension  Service,  Montana  State  Col- 
lege, Bozeman. 

Supervisor,  Visual  Aids  in  Education,  Department  of  Public  In- 
struction, Helena. 

NEHRASKA 

University  Extension  Division,  Univerisity  of  Nebraska,  Lincoln. 

NEVADA 

Extension  Forester  and  Film  Librarian,  University  of  Nevada, 
Reno. 

221 


WHERE    TO 
OBTAIN    HELP 

NEW    HAMPSHIRE 

Extension  Specialist  in  Visual  Aids,  University  of  New  Hampshire, 
Durham. 
Director,  Dartmouth  College  Films,  Hanover. 

NEW    JERSEY 

New  Jersey  State  Museum,  Trenton. 

Teaching  Aids  Service,  New  Jersey  State  Teachers  College,  Mont- 
clair. 

NEW    MEXICO 

Director  of  Extension,  University  of  New  Mexico,  Albuquerque. 

NEW    YORK 

Buffalo  Society  of  Natural  Science,  Buffalo. 

Principal,  State  Normal  and  Training  School,  Cortland. 

Executive  Secretary,  Cooperative  Film  Library,  State  Teachers 
College,  Fredonia. 

Film  Librarian,  New  York  University  Film  Library,  Washington 
Square,  New  York  City. 

Department  of  Education,  American  Museum  of  Natural  History, 
Central  Park  West  at  79th  Street,  New  York  City. 

Executive  Secretary,  Adirondack  Film  Library,  State  Teachers 
College,  Plattsburg. 

Executive  Secretary,  Potsdam  State  Teachers  College,  Coopera- 
tive School  Film  Library  of  Northern  New  York,  Potsdam. 

Librarian,  Rush  Rhees  Library,  University  of  Rochester,  Rochester. 

School  of  Education,  Syracuse  University,  Syracuse. 

NORTH    CAROLINA 

Bureau  of  Visual  Instruction,  University  Extension  Division,  Uni- 
versity of  North  Carolina,  Chapel  Hill. 

NORTH    DAKOTA 

Director  of  Visual  Education,  North  Dakota  State  College,  Fargo. 
University  Extension  Division,  University  Station,  Grand  Forks. 

222 


DISTRIBUTION 
CENTERS 

OHIO 

Director  of  Visual  Instruction,  State  Department  of  Education, 
Columbus. 

OKLAHOMA 

Director  of  Visual  Instruction,  East  Central  State  College,  Ada. 
Extension  Division,  University  of  Oklahoma,  Norman. 

OREGON 

Head,  Visual  Instruction  Department,  Oregon  State  College, 
Corvallis. 

PENNSYLVANIA 

Registrar,  Classroom  Film  Library,  Bucknell  University,  Lewis- 
burg. 

Sensory  Aids  Director,  State  Teachers  College,  Millersville. 

Curator,  Commercial  Museum,  Philadelphia. 

Curator,  University  Museum,  University  of  Pennsylvania,  33rd  and 
Spruce  Streets,  Philadelphia. 

Director,  P.C.W.  Film  Service,  Pennsylvania  College  for  Women, 
Pittsburgh. 

Supervisor,  Audio-Visual  Aids,  Pennsylvania  State  College,  State 
College. 

PUERTO    RICO 

Department  of  Education,  San  Juan. 

SOUTH    CAROLINA 

Director,  Extension  Division,  University  of  S.  C,  Columbia. 

SOUTH    DAKOTA 

Director  of  Extension,  University  of  South  Dakota,  Vermillion. 

TENNESSEE 

specialist  in  School  and  Community  Service,  University  Extension, 
University  of  Tennessee,  Box  4218,  University  Station,  Knoxville. 

Director,  Joint  University  Libraries,  Vanderbilt  University,  Nash- 
ville. 


WHERE  TO 
OBTAIN  HELP 

TEXAS 

Director,  Visual  Instruction,  Extension  Building,  University  of 
Texas,  Austin. 

Director,  Film  Division,  Bureau  of  Public  Service,  West  Texas 
State  Teachers  College,  Canyon. 

Department  of  Public  Service,  Sam  Houston  State  Teachers  Col- 
lege, Huntsville. 

Director,  East  Texas  Bureau  of  Visual  Education,  Kilgore  Junior 
College,  Kilgore. 

Director,  Division  of  Extension,  Texas  Technological  College, 
Lubbock. 

Department  of  Education,  S.  A.  Austin  State  Teachers  College, 
Nacogdoches. 

UTAH 

Secretary,  Bureau  of  Visual  Instruction,  Brigham  Young  University, 
Provo. 
Director,  Extension  Division,  University  of  Utah,  Salt  Lake  City. 

VERMONT 

Robert  Hull  Fleming  Museum,  Classroom  Film  Library,  Uni- 
versity of  Vermont,  Burlington. 

VIRGINIA 

Supervisor,  Audio-Visual  Education,  State  Board  of  Education, 
Richmond. 

Director,  Bureau  of  Audio-Visual  Aids,  Extension  Division,  Uni- 
versity of  Virginia,  University. 

WASHINGTON 

Director  of  Public  Service,  Central  Washington  College  of  Edu- 
cation, EUensburg. 

Director,  Bureau  of  Visual  Instruction,  State  College  of  Washing- 
ton, Pullman. 

224 


EQUIPMENT 
SUPPLIES 

WEST    VIRGINIA 

Librarian,  West  Virginia  University,  Morgantown. 

WISCONSIN 

Bureau  of  Visual  Instruction,  University  of  Wisconsin,  Madison. 


EQUIPMENT   AND    SUPPLIES 

MOTION    PICTURES 

A.  F.  Films,  Inc.  1600  Broadway,  New  York  19,  New  York 
Akin  and  Bagshaw,  Inc.,  2023  E.  Colfax  Avenue,  Denver,  Colorado 
American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  79th  Street  and  Central 

Park  West;  New  York  24,  New  York 
Association  Films  (Y.M.C.A.  Motion  Picture  Bureau) 

351  Turk  Street,  San  Francisco  2,  California 

19  South  La  Salle  Street,  Chicago  3,  Illinois 

347  Madison  Avenue,  New  York  17,  New  York 

1700  Patterson  Avenue,  Dallas  1,  Texas 
Astor  Pictures  Corporation,  130  West  46th  Street,  New  York  19, 

New  York 
Bailey  Film  Service,  P.O.  Box  2528,  Hollywood  28,  California 
Bausch  and  Lomb  Optical  Company,  Rochester  2,  New  York 
Bell  and  Howell  Company,  7100  McCormick  Road,  Chicago  45, 

Illinois 

Brandon  Films,  1600  Broadway,  New  York  19,  New  York 
Bray  Studios,  Inc.,  729  Seventh  Avenue,  New  York  19,  New  York 
Castle  Films,  Inc.,  30  Rockefeller  Plaza,  New  York  20,  New  York 
Cathedral  Films,  6404  Sunset  Boulevard,  P.O.  Box  589,  Hollywood 

28,  California 
Catholic  Movies,  220  West  42nd  Street,  New  York  18,  New  York; 

1409-79th  Street,  North  Bergen,  New  Jersey 
Commonwealth  Pictures  Corporation,  729  Seventh  Avenue,  New 

York  19,  New  York 

22,5 


WHERE    TO 
OBTAIN    HELP 

De  Vry  School  Films,  1111  Armitage  Avenue,  Chicago  11,  Illinois 
Eastman  Kodak  Stores,  Inc.  ( Kodascope  Libraries  Division ) ,  356 

Madison  Avenue,  New  York  17,  New  York 
Edited  Pictures  System,  165  West  46th  Street,  New  York  19,  New 

York 
Encyclopedia  Britannica  Films  Inc.,  20  North  Wacker  Drive, 

Chicago  6,  Illinois 
Eye  Gate  House,  Inc„  330  West  42nd  Street,  New  York  18,  New 

York 
Films,  Inc. 

1709  W.  8th  Street,  Los  Angeles  14,  California 

101  Marietta  Street,  Atlanta  3,  Georgia 

64  East  Lake  Street,  Chicago,  Illinois 

330  West  42nd  Street,  New  York  18,  New  York 

109  N.  Akard  Street,  Dallas  1,  Texas 
Gallagher  Fi^m  Service,  Bay  Theater  Building,  Green  Bay,  Wis- 
consin; 639  N.  7th  Street,  Milwaukee,  Wisconsin 
General  Electric  Company,  1  River  Road,  Schnectady  5,  New  York 
Hoffberg  Productions,  Inc., 620  Ninth  Avenue,  New  York  18,  N.Y. 
Institutional  Cinema  Service,  Inc.,  1560  Broadway,  New  York  19, 

New  York 
The  Jam  Handy  Organization,  2821  East  Grand  Boulevard,  Detroit 

11,  Michigan 
Knowledge  Builders   (Classroom  Films),  625  Madison  Avenue, 

New  York  22,  New  York 
Lewis  Film  Service,  1145  N.  Market  Street,  Wichita  5,  Kansas 
Metropolitan  Life  Insurance  Company  ( Health  and  Welfare  Divi- 
sion), 1  Madison  Avenue,  New  York  10,  New  York 
The  Museum  of  Modern  Art  Film  Library,  11  West  53rd  Street, 

New  York  19,  New  York 
Natiopal  Audubon  Society,  1000  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  28,  N.Y. 
National  Council  of  Teachers  of  English,  211  West  68th  Street, 

Chicago  21,  Illinois 

226 


EQUIPMENT 
SUPPLIES 

Official  Films,  Inc.,  25  West  45th  Street,  New  York  19,  New  York 
Pictorial  Films,  Inc.,  R.K.O.  Building,  Radio  City,  New  York  20, 

New  York 
Post  Pictures  Corporation,  723  Seventh  Avenue,  New  York  19, 

New  York 
The  Princeton  Film  Center,  Princeton,  New  Jersey 
Screen  Adettes  Inc. 

1709  West  8th  Street,  Los  Angeles  14,  California 

68  Post  Street,  San  Francisco  4,  California 

611  North  Tillamook  Street,  Portland  12,  Oregon 
Shadow  Arts  Studio,  1036  Chorro  Street,  San  Luis  Obispo,  Cali- 
fornia 
Southern  Visual  Films,   686-689   Shrine   Building,   Memphis   1, 

Tennessee 
Swank  Motion  Pictures,  614  N.  Skinker  Boulevard,  St.  Louis  5, 

Missouri 
Visual  Education,  Inc. 

Twelfth  at  Lamar,  Austin  21,  Texas 

602  N.  St.  Paul  Street,  Dallas  1,  Texas 

4431  Foard,  Fort  Worth,  Texas 

3905  South  Main  Street,  Houston  4,  Texas 
Young  America  Films,  Inc.,  18  East  41st  Street,  New  York  17, 

New  York 


FILMSTRIPS 

Castle  Films,  Inc.,  30  Rockefeller  Plaza,  New  York  20,  New  York 
Cathedral  Films,  6404  Sunset  Boulevard,  P.O.  Box  589,  Hollywood 

28,  California 
Eye  Gate  House,  Inc.,  330  West  42nd  Street,  New  York  18,  New 

York 
Informative  Classroom  Picture  Publishers,  40  Ionia  Avenue,  N.W., 

Grand  Rapids  2,  Michigan 

227 


WHERE    TO 
OBTAIN    HELP 


The  Jam  Handy  Organization,  2821  East  Grand  Boulevard,  De- 
troit 11,  Michigan 

Lee  Lyles,  Assistant  to  the  President,  Santa  Fe  Railway,  Chicago, 
Illinois 

Philp  Photo  Visual  Service,  1954  Pasadena  Avenue,  Long  Beach  6, 
California 

Society  for  Visual  Education,  Inc.,  100  East  Ohio  Street,  Chicago 
11,  Illinois 

Stillfilm,  Inc.,  8443  Melrose  Avenue,  Hollywood  46,  California 

Visual  Sciences,  SuflFern,  New  York 

The  Wild  Flower  Preservation  Society,  Inc.,  3740  OHver  Street 
N.W.,  Washington  15,  D.C. 

Young  America  Films,  18  East  41st  Street,  New  York  17,  New  York 


PROJECTORS 

American  Optical  Company,  Box  A,  Buffalo  15,  New  York 
Ampro  Corporation,  2835  N.  Western  Avenue,  Chicago  18,  Illinois; 
545  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York,  New  York 
Bausch  and  Lomb  Optical  Company,  Rochester  2,  New  York 
Bell  and  Howell  Company,  7100  McCormick  Road,  Chicago  45, 
Illinois 
Charles  Beseler  Company,  243  East  23rd  Street,  New  York  10, 
New  York 
De  Vry  Corporation,  1111  Armitage  Avenue,  Chicago  14,  Illinois 
Eastman  Kodak  Company,  Rochester  4,  New  York 
Eye  Gate  House,  Inc.,  330  West  42nd  Street,  New  York  18,  N.  Y. 
Gallagher  Film  Service,  Bay  Theater  Building,  Green  Bay,  Wis- 
consin; 639  N.  7th  Street,  Milwaukee,  Wisconsin 
Hirsch  and  Kaye,  239  Grant  Avenue,  San  Francisco  8,  CaUfornia 
Keystone  View  Company,  Meadville,  Pennsylvania 
Radio  Corporation  of  America,  RCA  Victor  Division,  Educational 
Department,  Camden,  New  Jersey 

228 


EQUIPMENT 
SUPPLIES 

Ralke  Company,  829  South  Flower  Street,  Los  Angeles  14,  Cali- 
fornia 
Ryan  Visual  Aids  Service,  409-411  Harrison  Street,  Davenport, 

Iowa 
Sawyer's  Inc.  (View-Master),  725  S.W.  20th  Place,  Portland  7, 

Oregon 
S.O.S.  Cinema  Supply  Corporation,  449  West  42nd  Street,  New 

York  18,  New  York 
Society  for  Visual  Education,  Inc.,  100  East  Ohio  Street,  Chicago 

11,  Illinois 
Southern  Visual  Films,   686-689  Shrine  Building,   Memphis   1, 

Tennessee 
Victor  Animatograph  Corporation   (Division  of  Curtiss-Wright 

Corp.),  Davenport,  Iowa 
Visual  Education,  Inc. 

Twelfth  at  Lamar,  Austin  21,  Texas 

602  N.  St.  Paul  Street,  Dallas  1,  Texas 

4431  Foard,  Fort  Worth,  Texas 

3905  South  Main  Street,  Houston  4,  Texas 

RECORDING    AND     SOUND     EQUIPMENT 

Audio  Devices,  Inc.,  444  Madison  Avenue,  New  York  22,  New  York 
David  Bogen  Company,  Inc.,  663  Broadway,  New  York  12,  N.  Y. 
General  Electric  Company,  River  Road,  Schenectady  5,  New  York 
The  Hallicrafters  Company,  4401  West  Fifth  Avenue,  Chicago  24, 

Illinois 
Radio  Corporation  of  America,  RCA  Victor  Division,  Educational 

Department,  Camden,  New  Jersey 
Rek-0-Kut  Company,  146  Grand  Street,  New  York  13,  New  York 
Wilcox-Gay  Corporation,  Charlotte,  Michigan 

SCREENS 

Da-Lite  Screen  Company,  Inc.,  2711-23  N.  Pulaski  Road,  Chicago 
39,  Ilhnois 

229 


WHERE    TO 
OBTAIN    HELP 

Eye  Gate  House,  Inc.,  330  West  42nd  Street,  New  York  18,  New 
York 

Hirsch  and  Kaye,  239  Grant  Avenue,  San  Francisco  8,  California 

Radiant  Manufacturing  Corporation,  1140-46  West  Superior  Street, 
Chicago  22,  Illinois 

Society  for  Visual  Education,  Inc.,  100  East  Ohio  Street,  Chicago 
11,  Illinois 

Southern  Visual  Fihns,  686-689  Shrine  Building,  Memphis  1,  Ten- 
nessee 


SLIDES 

American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  79th  Street  and  Central 
Park  West,  New  York  24,  New  York 

Art  Education,  Inc.,  6  East  34th  Street,  New  York  16,  New  York 
(2x2"  slides  only) 

Brooking  Tatum,  Kelseyville,  California 
(2x2"  slides  only) 

Castle  Films,  Inc.,  30  Rockefeller  Plaza,  New  York  20,  New  York 
(2x2"  slides  only) 

Eye  Gate  House,  Inc.,  330  West  42nd  Street,  New  York  18,  New 
York 

Gallagher  Film  Service,  Bay  Theater  Building,  Green  Bay,  Wis- 
consin; 639  N.  7th  Street,  Milwaukee,  Wisconsin;  (2x2"  sHdes 
only) 

Hirsch  and  Kaye,  239  Grant  Avenue,  San  Francisco  8,  California 

Keystone  View  Company,  Meadville,  Pennsylvania 

Kime  Kolor  Pictures,  1761  Sonoma  Drive,  Altadena,  California 
(2x2"  slides  only) 

Metropolitan  Museum  of  Art,  82nd  Street  and  Fifth  Avenue,  New 
York  28,  New  York 

Munday  and  Collins,  814  West  8th  Street,  Los  Angeles  14,  Cali- 
fornia 

230 


MAPS,    CHARTS 
GLOBES 

National  Audubon  Society,  1000  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  28,  New 
York 

Philp  Photo  Visual  Service,  1954  Pasadena  Avenue,  Long  Beach  6, 
California  ( 2x2"  slides  only ) 

Ryan  Visual  Aids  Service,  409-411  Harrison  Street,  Davenport, 
Iowa 

Shadow  Arts  Studio,  1036  Chorro  Street,  San  Luis  Obispo,  Cali- 
fornia 

Society  for  Visual  Education,  Inc.,  100  East  Ohio  Street,  Chicago 
11,  Illinois 

STEREOGRAPHS     AND     STEREOSCOPES 

Keystone  View  Company,  Meadville,  Pennsylvania 
Sawyer's  Inc.  (View-Master),  725  S.W.  20th  Place,  Portland  7, 
Oregon 

MAPS,   CHARTS   AND   GLOBES 

Denoyer-Geppert  Company,  5235  Ravenswood  Avenue,  Chicago 

40,  Illinois 
C.  S.  Hammond  and  Company,  88  Lexington  Avenue,  New  York 

16,  New  York 
National  Geographic  Society  ( School  Service  Division ) ,  16  and  M 

Streets  N.W.,  Washington  6,  D.C. 
A.  J.  Nystrom  and  Company,  3333  Elston  Avenue,  Chicago  18, 

Illinois 
Rand  McNally  and  Company 

125  E.  Sixth  Street,  Los  Angeles,  California 

619  Mission  Street,  San  Francisco,  California 

National  Press  Building,  Washington,  D.C. 

536  S.  Clark  Street,  Chicago,  Illinois 

111  Eighth  Avenue,  New  York  11,  New  York 
Weber  Costello  Company,  12th  and  McKinley,  Chicago  Heights, 

Illinois 

231 


WHERE    TO 
OBTAIN    HELP 

MUSEUMS   COOPERATING  WITH  AUDIO- 
VISUAL EDUCATION  PROGRAMS 

Since  there  are  many  museums  in  the  United  States,  it  would  be 
beyond  the  scope  of  this  book  to  Hst  them  all.  A  classified  direc- 
tory of  the  nation's  museums  is  contained  in  The  Museum  In 
America  by  Laurence  V.  Coleman.  Price  per  set  $7.50.  Published 
by  the  American  Association  of  Museums,  at  the  Smithsonian  In- 
stitution, Washington  25,  D.C.  This  book  may  be  seen  in  any 
museum  library. 


Following  is  a  partial  listing  of  representative  Aiuseums  offering 
their  facilities  for  use  in  audio-visual  education: 

ARIZONA 

Petrified  Forest  National  Monument,  Holbrook 

CALIFORNIA 

Los  Angeles  County  Museum  of  History,  Science  and  Art,  Exposi- 
tion Park,  Los  Angeles  7 

Southwest  Museum,  Los  Angeles  42 

Oakland  Public  Museum,  1426  Oak  Street,  Oakland  12 

Junipero  Serra  Museum,  San  Diego  Historical  Society,  2727  Presi- 
dio Drive,  San  Diego  3 

San  Diego  Museum  of  Man,  Balboa  Park,  San  Diego 

California  Academy  of  Sciences,  Golden  Gate  Park,  San  Francisco 
18 

California  Palace  of  the  Legion  of  Honor,  Lincoln  Park,  San  Fran- 
cisco 21 

M.  H.  De  Young  Memorial  Museum,  Golden  Gate  Park,  San  Fran- 
cisco 

Junior  Museum,  600  Ocean  Avenue,  San  Francisco 

232 


MUSEUMS 
COOPERATING 

COLORADO 

University  of  Colorado  Museum,  Boulder 

The  Denver  Art  Museum,  Denver 

Mesa  Verde  National  Park  Museum,  Mesa  Verde  National  Park 

Rocky  Mountain  National  Park,  Estes  Park 

CONNECTICUT 

The  Bruce  Museum  of  Greenwich,  Greenwich 
Children's  Museum  of  Hartford,  609  Farmington  Avenue,  Hart- 
ford 5 
Yale  University  Art  Gallery,  New  Haven 

The  Slater  Memorial  Museum,  Norwich  Free  Academy,  Norwich 
Stamford  Museum  of  Natural  History,  Stamford 

DISTRICT    OF    COLUMBIA 

The  Howard  University  Gallery  of  Art,  Founders  Library,  Howard 
University,  Washington  1 

The  Barnett  Aden  Gallery,  127  Randolph  Place  N.W.,  Wash- 
ington 1 

ILLINOIS 

The  Art  Institute  of  Chicago,  Michigan  Avenue  at  Adams  Street, 

Chicago  3 
The  Chicago  Academy  of  Sciences,  2001  North  Clark  Street, 

Chicago  14 
Illinois  State  Museum,  Springfield 

IOWA 

Davenport  Public  Museum,  Davenport 
Department  of  History  and  Archives,  Des  Moines 
Museum  of  Natural  History,  University  of  Iowa,  Iowa  City 

KENTUCKY 

The  Baker-Hunt  Foundation,  Inc.,  620  Greenup  Street,  Covington 
The  J.  B.  Speed  Memorial  (Art)  Museum,  Third  and  Shipp  Streets, 
Louisville  8 

233 


WHERE    TO 
OBTAIN    HELP 

LOUISIANA 

Louisiana  State  Museum,  Jackson  Square,  New  Orleans  16 

MAINE 

Wadsworth-Longfellow  House,  487  Congress  Street,  Portland 

MARYLAND 

Baltimore  Museum  of  Art,  Wyman  Park,  Baltimore  18 
Ft.  McHenry,  Baltimore 

Maryland  Historical  Society  Museum  and  Library,  201  W.  Monu- 
ment Street,  Baltimore  1 

Municipal  Museum  of  the  City  of  Baltimore,  Baltimore 
Star-Spangled  Banner  Flag  House,  844  E.  Pratt  Street,  Baltimore 
Walters  Art  Gallery,  Baltimore 
The  Washington  County  Museum  of  Fine  Arts,  Hagerstown 

MASSACHUSETTS 

Addison  Gallery  of  American  Art,  Andover 

Attleboro  Museum,  Attleboro 

The  Children's  Museum  (Boston),  60  Burroughs  Street,  Jamaica 
Plain  30 

Institute  of  Modern  Art,  Boston 

Museum  of  Fine  Arts,  Boston  15 

Society  for  the  Preservation  of  New  England  Antiquities,  141  Cam- 
bridge Street,  Boston 

Fogg  Art  Museum,  Harvard  University,  Cambridge  38 

Botanical  Museum,  Harvard  University,  Cambridge 

The  Longfellow  House,  105  Brattle  Street,  Cambridge 

The  Fitchburg  Art  Center,  Fitchburg 

The  Berkshire  Museum,  Pittsfield 

The  Essex  Institute,  Salem 

Springfield  Museum  of  Art,  Springfield 

Department  of  Art  ( Farnsworth  Museum  of  Art ) ,  Wellesley  Col- 
lege, Wellesley  81 

Lawrence  Art  Museum,  Williams  College,  Williamstown 

Worcester  Art  Museum,  Worcester 

234 


MUSEUMS 
COOPERATING 

MICHIGAN 

Educational  Department,  The  Detroit  Institute  of  Arts,  Detroit  2 
Children's  Museum  of  Detroit,  5205  Cass  Avenue,  Detroit  2 
Grand  Rapids  Public  Museum  (Kent  Scientific  Museum),  Grand 

Rapids 
The  Kalamazoo  Institute  of  Arts,  Kalamazoo  9 
Kalamazoo  Museum,  335  South  Rose  Street,  Kalamazoo 

MINNESOTA 

The  Minneapolis  Institute  of  Arts,  Minneapolis  4 
Minneapolis  Science  Museum,  10th  and  Hennepin,  Minneapolis 
Minnesota  Museum  of  Natural  History,  University  of  Minnesota, 
Minneapolis  14 
Saint  Paul  Institute,  St.  Paul 
St.  Paul  Science  Museum,  51  University  Avenue,  St.  Paul 

MISSOURI 

William  Rockhill  Nelson  Gallery  of  Art,  Atkins  Museum  of  Fine 

Arts,  Kansas  2 

The  St.  Joseph  Museum,  19th  at  Felix,  St.  Joseph  23 
City  Art  Museum  of  St.  Louis,  Forest  Park  5 
Missouri  Historical  Society,  Jefferson  Memorial  Building,  St.  Louis 

12 
Division  of  Audio- Visual  Education  of  the  St.  Louis  Public  Schools, 

4466  OHve  Street,  St.  Louis  8 

MONTANA 

Glacier  National  Park  Museum,  Helton 

NEW    HAMPSHIRE 

The  Currier  Gallery  of  Art,  192  Orange  Street,  Manchester 

NEW    JERSEY 

The  Montclair  Art  Museum,  South  Mountain  and  Bloomfield 
Avenues,  Montclair 


235 


WHERE    TO 
OBTAIN    HELP 

NEW    MEXICO 

Aztec  Ruins  National  Monument,  P.O.  Box  457,  Aztec 
Laboratory  of  Anthropology,  Santa  Fe 
Museum  of  New  Mexico,  Santa  Fe 

NEW    YORK     (  CITY  ) 

Poe  Cottage,  Kingsbridge  Road  at  Grand  Concourse,  Bronx 
Brooklyn  Children's  Museum,   Brooklyn  Avenue  and  Prospect 

Place,  Brooklyn 
The  Brooklyn   Museum,   The   Brooklyn   Institute   of   Arts   and 

Sciences,  Eastern  Parkway  and  Washington  Avenue,  Brooklyn  17 
LeflFerts  Homestead,  Prospect  Park  at  Flatbush  Avenue  and  Empire 

Boulevard,  Brooklyn 
The  American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  Central  Park  West  at 

79th  Street,  New  York  24 
American  Numismatic  Society,  Broadway  and  156th  Street,  New 

York  32 
The  Cloisters  (branch.  Metropolitan  Museum  of  Art),  Fort  Tryon 

Park  33,  New  York 

Fraunces  Tavern,  Broad  and  Pearl  Streets,  New  York 
The  Frick  Collection,  1  East  70th  Street,  New  York  21 
The  Hispanic  Society  of  America,  Broadway  and  156th  Street,  New 

York  32 
The  Metropolitan  Museum  of  Art,  Fifth  Avenue  and  82nd  Street, 

New  York  28 
Museum  of  the  American  Indian,  Broadway  at  155th  Street,  New 

York 
Museum  of  the  City  of  New  York,  Fifth  Avenue  at  104th  Street, 

New  York 
The  Museum  of  Modern  Art,  11  West  33rd  Street,  New  York 
The  New  York  Botanic  Garden  Museum,  801  Madison  Avenue, 

New  York 
The  New  York  Historical  Society,  170  Central  Park  West,  New 

York  24 

236 


MUSEUMS 
COOPERATING 

New  York  Museum  of  Science  and  Industry,  30  Rockefeller  Plaza, 

New  York  20 
New  York  Zoological  Park,  Bronx  Park,  New  York  60 
The  Pierpont  Morgan  Library,  29  East  36th  Street,  New  York 
The  Roger  Morris-Jumel  Mansion,  160th  Street  and  Edgecombe 

Avenue,  New  York 
Theodore  Roosevelt  House,  28  East  20th  Street,  New  York 
Van  Cortlandt  House  Museum,  Van  Cortlandt  Park,  New  York 
Whitney  Museum  of  American  Art,  10  West  8th  Street,  New  York 
The  Staten  Island  Institute  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  Stuyvesant  Place 

and  Wall  Street,  St.  George,  Staten  Island 

NEW    YORK    (state) 

Wells  College,  Department  of  Fine  Arts,  Aurora-on-Cayuga 
The  Bear  Mountain  Trailside  Museums  and  Nature  Trails,  Pali- 
sades Interstate  Park  Commission,  Bear  Mountain 
Albright  Art  Gallery,  BuflFalo  9 

BuflFalo  Museum  of  Science,  Humboldt  Park,  BuflFalo  11 
Hudson  River  Museum  at  Yonkers,  Trevor  Park,  Yonkers  3 

OHIO 

The  Akron  Art  Institute,  140  East  Market  Stieet,  Akron  8 

Taft  Museum,  Cincinnati  Institute  of  Fine  Arts,  316  Pike  Street, 

Cincinnati  2 
Cincinnati  Art  Museum,  Eden  Park,  Cincinnati  6 
Cincinnati  Museum  of  Natural  History,  Central  Parkway  at  Wal- 
nut Street,  Cincinnati  10 
The  Cleveland  Museum  of  Art,  Cleveland  6 
The  Cleveland  Museum  of  Natural  History,  2717  Euclid  Avenue, 
Cleveland  15 
Ohio  State  Museum  ( Educational  Service ) ,  Columbus 
Johnson  Humrickhouse  Memorial  Museum,  Coshocton 
Dayton  Public  Library  Museum,  251  E.  2nd  Street  corner  Patter- 
son Boulevard,  Dayton,  2 

237 


WHERE    TO 
OBTAIN    HELP 

Art  Institute,  Massillon 

The  Dudley  Peter  Allen  Memorial  Art  Museum,  Oberlin  College, 
Oberlin 

Butler  Art  Institute,  524  Wick  Avenue,  Youngstown  2 
Art  Institute,  Zanesville 

OREGON 

Portland  Art  Museum,  West  Park  and  Madison,  Portland  5 

PENNSYLVANIA 

Pennsylvania  State  Museum,  Harrisburg 

The  Commercial  Museum,  34th  Street  below  Spruce,  Philadelphia  4 

The  Franklin  Institute  of  the  State  of  Pennsylvania,  Philadelphia  3 

Independence  Hall,  National  Museum,  Philadelphia 

The  University  Museum,  University  of  Pennsylvania,  33rd  and 

Spruce  Streets,  Philadelphia  4 
Carnegie  Museum,  Pittsburgh  13 

The  Reading  Public  Museum  and  Art  Gallery,  Reading 
Everhart  Museum  of  Natural  History,  Science  and  Art,  Scranton 

RHODE    ISLAND 

Rhode  Island  School  of  Design  Museum,  Providence  3 

SOUTH    CAROLINA 

The  Charleston  Museum,  Charleston  16 
The  Gibbs  Art  Gallery,  Charleston 
State  Forestry  Commission,  Columbia 

TEXAS 

Witte  Museum,  Brackenridge  Park,  San  Antonio  t 

UTAH 

Zion  Museum,  Zion  National  Park,  Springdale 

VERMONT 

Historical  Museum,  Bennington 
Old  Stone  House,  Brown ington 
Robert  Hull  Fleming  Museum,  University  of  Vermont,  Burlington 

238 


PICTURES 
PRINTS 

White  Schoolhouse,  East  Burke 

Fairbanks  Museum  of  Natural  Science,  St.  Johnsbury 
Westminster  Institute,  Westminster 
Country  Store  Museum,  Weston 

Williams  Collection  of  Japanese  Art  (Norman  Williams  Library), 
Woodstock 

VIRGINIA 

Mount  Vernon  Ladies'  Association,  Mount  Vernon 

The  Valentine  Museum,  1015  East  Clay  Street,  Richmond  19 

Colonial  Williamsburg,  Inc.,  Williamsburg 

WASHINGTON 

Mount  Rainier  National  Park,  Longmire 

WISCONSIN 

Neville  Public  Museum,  129  S.  JeflFerson  Street,  Green  Bay 
Janesville  Art  League,  Woman's  Club,  108  S.  Jackson,  Janesville 
Kenosha  Historical  and  Art  Museum,  Civic  Center,  Kenosha 
Madison  Art  Association,  2011  Monroe  Street,  Madison 
The  State  Historical  Society  of  Wisconsin  Museum,  816  State 

Street,  Madison  6 
Wisconsin  Union,  University  of  Wisconsin,  Madison 
Milwaukee  Art  Institute,  772  N.  Jefferson  Street,  Milwaukee  2 
Milwaukee  Public  Museum,  Milwaukee  3 
Oshkosh  Public  Museum,  787  Algoma  Boulevard,  Oshkosh 
The  Charles  A.  Wustum  Museum  of  Fine  Arts,  2542  N.  Western 

Avenue,  Racine 

PICTURES  AND  PRINTS 

Art  Education,  Inc.,  6  East  34th  Street,  New  York  16,  New  York 
Artext  Prints,  Inc.,  Westport,  Connecticut 

Colonial  Art  Company,  1336-1338  N.  West  First  Street,  Oklahoma 
City  4,  Oklahoma 

239 


WHERE    TO 
OBTAIN    HELP 

F.  E.  Compton  Company,  1000  North  Dearborn  Street,  Chicago  10, 

Illinois 
Creative  Education  Society,  Mankato,  Minnesota 
Informative  Classroom  Picture  Publishers,  40  Ionia  Avenue,  N.W., 

Grand  Rapids  2,  Michigan 
Metropolitan  Museum  of  Art,  82nd  Street  and  Fifth  Avenue,  New 

York  28,  New  York 
National  Audubon  Society,  1000  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  28,  N.  Y. 
National  Geographic  Society  (School  Service  Division),  16  and 

M  Streets  N.W.,  Washington  6,  D.C. 
The  Perry  Pictures  Company,  Maiden,  Massachusetts 
Rudolf  Lesch  Fine  Arts,  Inc.,  225  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  10, 

New  York 
University  Prints,  11  Boyd  Street,  Newton  58,  Massachusetts 
W.  A.  Wilde  Company,  131  Clarendon  Street,  Boston  16,  Mass. 

PROGRAM  SOURCES 

Audio-Visual  Aids  Information  Center,  American  Museum  of 
Natural  History,  79th  Street  and  Central  Park  West,  New  York  24, 
New  York 

Columbia  Broadcasting  Company,  485  Madison  Avenue,  New  York 
22,  New  York 

Department  of  Visual  Instruction,  National  Education  Associa- 
tion, 1201  Sixteenth  Street,  N.  W.,  Washington,  D.C. 

Directory  of  Film  Sources,  Bell  and  Howell  Company,  7100  Mc- 
Cormick  Road,  Chicago  45,  Illinois 

Education  Film  Guide,  H.  W.  Wilson  Company,  950-972  Univer- 
sity Avenue,  New  York  52,  New  York 


240 


BOOKS 
MAGAZINES 

PUBLICATIONS 

BOOKS 

Dale,  E.,  Audio-Visual  Methods  in  Teaching,  1946,  Dry  den  Press, 

New  York,  New  York. 
Dent,  E.  C  ,  The  Audio-Visual  Handbook.  1946.  Society  for  Visual 

Education,  Inc.,  Chicago,  Illinois. 
Hoban,  C.  F.,  Jr.,  Focus  on  Learning:  Motion  Pictures  in  the  School. 

1942.  American  Council  on  Education,  Washington,  D.C. 
Hoban,  C.  F.;  Hoban,  C.  F.,  Jr.,  Visualizing  the  Curriculum,  1937. 

The  Cordon  Company,  New  York,  New  York. 
Keith,  Alice,  How  To  Speak  and  Write  for  Radio,  1944.  Harper 

and  Brothers,  New  York,  New  York. 
Levenson,  W.  B.,  Teaching  Through  Radio.  1945.  Farrar  and  Rine- 

hart,  New  York,  New  York. 
McKown,  H.  C;  Roberts,  A.  B.,  Audio-Visual  Aids  to  Instruction. 

1940.  McGraw-Hill  Company,  New  York,  New  York. 
Wittich,  W.  A.;  Fowlkes,  J.  G.,  Audio-Visual  Paths  to  Learning. 

1946.  Harper  and  Brothers,  New  York,  New  York. 

MAGAZINES 

Business  Screen,  20  North  Wacker  Drive,  Chicago,  11,  Illinois. 
Educational  Screen,  64  East  Lake  Street,  Chicago,  Illinois. 
Audio-Visual  Guide,  172  Renner  Avenue,  Newark,  New  Jersey. 
Film  News,  American  Film  Center,  Inc.;  45  Rockefeller  Plaza, 

New  York  20,  New  York. 
Film  World,  6060  Sunset  Boulevard,  Hollywood  28,  California. 
New  Movies,  National  Board  of  Review  of  Motion  Pictures,  70 

Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  11,  New  York. 
See  and  Hear,  E.  M.  Hale  Company,  Eau  Claire,  Wisconsin. 


241 


GLOSSARY 


The  terms  included  in  this  glossary  are  those  used  in  the  body  of 
this  textbook.  From  time  to  time  commercial  dealers  and  the  pro- 
ducers of  various  audio-visual  aids  prepare  new  equipment,  and 
the  reader  is  advised  to  consult  the  catalogs  and  magazines  dealing 
with  such  materials  for  additions  and  modifications  in  terminology. 

ANAGLYPH.  A  special  type  of  stereoscopic  picture  printed  in 
two  colors  ( red  and  blue ) .  This  picture  must  be  viewed  through 
a  stereoscopic  viewer  fitted  with  similar  two-color  filters  in  order 
to  obtain  the  three-dimensional  effect  which  it  is  designed  to  give. 

ARTIFACTS.  Anything  made  or  modified  by  human  skill;  arti- 
ficially produced  evidences  of  the  life  and  culture  of  peoples. 

AUDIO-VISUAL  MATERIALS.  All  or  any  of  those  teaching 
aids  which  may  be  brought  to  bear  upon  a  lesson  for  the  purpose 
of  vitalizing  and  enriching  the  learning  experience  for  the  child. 

BALOPTICON.  Trade  name  for  the  projector  made  by  the 
Bausch  and  Lomb  Company  for  the  projection  of  lantern  slides  and 
opaque  materials.  ( See  Opaque  Projector. ) 

BEADED  SCREEN.  A  white  cloth  screen,  in  the  surface  coat- 
ing of  which  are  millions  of  small  bead-particles  of  crystal  or  glass. 
Due  to  the  combination  of  the  reflective  qualities  of  both  the  cloth 
and  the  beads,  this  screen  gives  a  semi-diffuse  reflection  of  light 
which  is  particularly  effective  for  small  projection  rooms,  where 
the  viewing  angle  is  less  than  twenty-two  degrees,  and  for  color 
projection.  ( See  also  Opaque  Screen,  Screen,  Sound  Screen,  Trans- 
lucent Screen.) 

243 


GLOSSARY 

CHART.  A  diagram,  outline  or  delineation,  having  some  geo- 
graphical or  physical  signification;  a  type  of  graph  showing 
changes;  a  tabular  representation  of  factual  data. 

COLLECTION.  A  group  of  materials  brought  together  in  one 
place.  The  materials  may  be  related  in  type  and  subject  or  they 
may  be  totally  different. 

COVER  GLASS.  The  clear,  protecting  glass  placed  over  the 
picture  drawn  on  etched  or  ground  glass  to  make  a  lantern  slide. 
The  cover  glass  serves  to  protect  the  slide  picture. 

DELINEASCOPE.  Trade  name  for  the  projector  manu- 
factured by  the  Spencer  Lens  Company  for  the  projection  of 
lantern  slides  and  opaque  materials.  ( See  Opaque  Projector. ) 

DESIGN.  The  composition  or  arrangement  of  the  various  ele- 
ments of  a  picture  to  form  an  harmonious  pattern. 

DIORAMA.  The  miniature,  three-dimensional  group  consisting 
of  small  modeled  and  colored  figures  and  specimens,  with  acces- 
sories, in  an  appropriate  setting,  and  in  most  instances  artificially 
lighted.  The  scale  and  size  of  the  group  is  variable;  there  is  no 
limitation  as  to  subject  matter,  which  may  be  realistic  or  imagina- 
tive according  to  what  the  creator  of  the  group  wishes  to  portray. 

EIGHT  MILLIMETER  FILM.  The  narrow-gauge,  acetate- 
base  film  now  available  for  use  in  classroom  and  home.  At  present 
it  is  not  used  to  any  great  extent  in  schools,  and  is  generally  limited 
in  scope  and  use.  (See  also  Sixteen  Millimeter  Film,  Thirty-five 
Millimeter  Film,  Motion  Picture  Film,  Silent  Film,  Sound  Film. ) 

ETCHED  GLASS.  Glass,  one  side  or  surface  of  which  has  been 
etched  or  ground  with  an  abrasive.  Glass  so  treated  is  most  satis- 
factory for  the  making  of  lantern  slides,  as  it  takes  crayon,  pencil, 
ink  and  paint  markings.  It  is  also  known  as  Ground  Glass. 

EXHIBIT.  A  formal  arrangement  or  presentation  of  objects, 
244 


GLOSSARY 

models,  specimens  or  collections  of  materials  for  purposes  of  dis- 
play and  study. 

FIELD  TRIP.  A  journey  taken  by  a  class  or  school  group  to  some 
point  of  interest  outside  the  school  building.  The  journey  may  be 
for  the  purpose  of  supplementing  school  work,  or  it  may  be  for 
social  purposes.  ( See  also  Treasure  Trip. ) 

FILMSLIDE.  A  slide  made  directly  on  color  or  black  and  white 
35  mm.  non-inflammable  film.  The  film  is  processed  by  the  manu- 
facturer and  returned  as  individual  slides,  either  in  cardboard 
mounts  or  in  glass  mounts.  ( See  also  Filmstrip,  Slidefilm,  Picturol, 
Stillfilm.) 

FILMSTRIP.  A  sequence  of  still  pictures  made  on  a  continuous 
roll  of  thirty-five  millimeter,  non-inflammable  film,  in  black  and 
white  or  color,  containing  sprocket  holes  and  projected  by  means 
of  a  special  projector  made  for  this  type  of  film.  Single  frame  film- 
strips  pass  vertically  through  the  projector;  double  frame  film- 
strips  pass  through  horizontally.  (See  also  Filmslide,  Picturol, 
Slidefilm,  Stillfilm.) 

FILMSTRIP  PROJECTOR.  A  machine  especially  designed 
for  the  projection  of  filmstrip  material. 

FLAT  PICTURES.  The  usual  term  applied  to  all  unprojected 
prints,  drawings,  sketches  and  photographs. 

GLASS  SLIDE.  Designation  for  a  lantern  slide,  either  colored 
or  black  and  white,  made  on  glass,  size  3/4  by  4  inches,  to  be  used 
in  a  standard  size  lantern  slide  projector.  ( See  Lantern  Slide. ) 

GLOBE.  A  spherical  body  on  whose  surface  is  depicted  a  repre- 
sentation of  the  geography  of  the  earth  or  heaven.  When  the 
representation  is  that  of  the  earth's  surface,  the  sphere  is  called 
a  terrestrial  globe.  When  the  representation  is  that  of  heavenly 
bodies,  the  sphere  is  known  as  a  celestial  globe. 

GRAPH.  A  diagrammatic  representation  of  any  sort  of  relation- 
ship by  means  of  a  system  of  dot  and  line  markings. 

245 


GLOSSARY 

GROUND  GLASS.  See  Etched  Glass. 

HABITAT  GROUP.  The  life-size,  life-scale,  three-dimensional 
group  erected  as  a  fixed  part  of  the  exhibits  in  a  museum,  for  the 
purpose  of  displaying  materials  and  specimens  against  a  painted 
background  which  depicts,  or  is  a  composite  approximating,  an 
actual  locality,  and  with  accessories  so  arranged  as  to  form  an 
integral  part  of  the  group,  usually  artificially  lighted.  The  true 
habitat  group  is  a  blending  of  accurate  background,  accessories 
and  specimens  so  that  it  is  a  complete  unit  artistically,  geographic- 
ally, historically  and  biologically. 

INTEGRATION.  The  "bringing  together  of  parts  into  a  whole"; 
used  in  connection  with  the  various  areas  of  the  curriculum;  as,  the 
integration  of  these  areas  through  audio- visual  aids. 

KIT.  A  collection  of  audio-visual  teaching  materials  in  a  box  or 
container.  The  materials  included  in  this  teaching  kit  are  usually 
put  together  for  a  specific  purpose,  and  to  illustrate  or  to  amplify  a 
specific  topic. 

KODACHROME  SLIDE.  The  trade  name  for  the  miniature 
lantern  slide  made  on  Eastman  Kodak  Company  color  film.  (See 
Miniature  Slide. ) 

LANTERN  SLIDE.  A  picture  made  on  glass,  film  or  specially 
prepared  material,  and  placed  between  glass  or  in  a  cardboard 
mount,  and  shown  by  means  of  a  lantern  slide  projector.  In  the 
United  States  all  standard  lantern  slides  are  made  in  size  3/4  by  4 
inches.  The  slides  must  be  so  made  that  they  can  be  placed  in  the 
carrier  of  the  projector  with  the  longer  edges  at  the  top  and  bot- 
tom. (See  also  Kodachrome  Slide,  Miniature  Slide,  Photographic 
Lantern  Slide. ) 

MAP.  A  pictorial  representation  showing  the  extent  and  relative 
position  of  the  geographical  features  of  the  world  and  conveying 
topographical  or  other  information. 

246 


GLOSSARY 

MAT.  A  thick  paper  or  cardboard  in  or  on  which  a  picture  is  dis- 
played. The  term  also  refers  to  the  surface  of  a  picture  or  painting 
purposely  made  with  a  dull  finish. 

MINIATURE  SLIDE.  The  2x2  inch  slide  made  by  photo- 
graphing directly  on  black  and  white  or  color  35  mm.  film.  The 
slide  so  made  is  mounted  in  a  cardboard  mount  or  between  glass, 
and  is  shown  by  means  of  a  projector  made  to  accommodate  this 
size  slide.  ( See  also  Two  by  Two  Lantern  Slides. ) 

MODEL.  A  representation  or  replica  of  an  actual  object. 

MOTION  PICTURE  FILM.  The  film  on  which  is  photo- 
graphed a  series  of  pictures  or  images  later  projected  in  the  form 
known  as  motion  pictures.  There  are  three  widths  of  film  in  use 
today,  the  35  mm.,  the  16  mm.,  and  the  8  mm.  (See  also  Sound 
Film  and  Silent  Film. ) 

MOTION  PICTURE  PROJECTOR.  A  machine  especially 
designed  for  the  projection  of  motion  picture  film.  A  machine  of 
this  type  is  made  either  for  the  projection  of  silent  motion  pictures 
or  for  sound  motion  pictures.  Only  silent  film  may  be  projected  on 
a  silent  motion  picture  projector;  a  sound  motion  picture  projector 
will  project  sound  films  and  also  silent  film  when  the  sound  track 
switch  is  cut  off. 

MOUNT.  The  support,  frame  or  background  material  upon  which 
or  by  whish  anything  is  prepared  and  presented  for  use,  exhibition 
or  examination. 

MULTI-SENSORY.  That  which  appeals  to  two  or  more  of 
the  senses;  sight,  hearing,  touch,  feeling  and  smell. 

NOMOGRAM.  A  study  chart,  diagram  or  outline,  to  which  name 
or  identification  labels  may  be  affixed.  A  type  of  training  device. 

OBJECT.  In  audio-visual  instruction  this  term  is  used  to  mean 

247 


GLOSSARY 

the  real  or  actual  thing  as  opposed  to  a  representation,  artificial 
reproduction  or  model. 

OPAQUE  PROJECTOR.  A  projection  machine  especially  de- 
signed to  enable  one  to  project  flat  pictorial  material  in  a  manner 
similar  to  the  projection  of  lantern  slides.  (See  also  Balopticon, 
Delineascope. ) 

OPAQUE  SCREEN.  The  flat  white-surface  screen  on  which 
may  be  projected  black  and  white  or  color  silent  motion  pictures 
or  lantern  slides.  The  surface  coating  may  be  aluminum  or  the  flat 
white,  so-called  "matte"  coating  which  produces  an  even  distribu- 
tion of  light. 

ORIENTATION.  The  process  through  which  a  person  goes  to 
find  his  correct  position  in  the  group,  community,  or  world. 

PERSPECTIVE.  The  science  which  studies  and  explains  how 
to  paint  or  draw  a  scene  so  that  objects  in  it  have  their  right  shapes 
and  appearances.  In  the  language  of  the  artist,  it  is  the  making  of 
objects  seem  far  away  or  near  to. 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  LANTERN  SLIDE.  A  lantern  slide  in 
which  the  pictorial  image  is  printed  directly  on  the  photographic 
lantern  slide  plate  from  a  negative,  processed,  and  then  colored  if 
desired.  The  slide  so  made  is  then  covered  with  a  cover  glass,  and 
projected  as  a  standard  lantern  slide.  ( See  also  Lantern  Slide,  Mini- 
ature Slide. ) 

PICTUROL.  The  trade  name  for  the  continuous  roll  of  35  mm. 
film  manufactured  by  the  Society  for  Visual  Education.  ( See  also 
Filmslide,  Filmstrip,  Stillfilm.) 

PLAY-BACK.  A  phonograph  or  turn-table  device  on  which 
records  may  be  played. 

PRINT.  A  positive  picture  or  reproduction  made  from  a  negative. 
Applied  in  audio-visual  instruction  to  pictures,  photographs,  and 
films. 

248 


GLOSSARY 

PROJECTOR.  A  mechanical  device  for  the  reproduction  or 
showing  of  a  pictorial  representation.  (See  also  Motion  Picture 
Projector,  Filmstrip  Projector,  Opaque  Projector,  Stereopticon. ) 

REAL  I  A.  A  general  term  appHed  to  authentic  material  of  any 
type.  Applied  in  audio-visual  instruction  to  that  material  which  is 
real  and  authentic. 

RECORD.  A  cylinder  or  disc  plate  prepared  in  such  a  way  as  to 
reproduce  sounds  when  brought  into  contact  with  the  needle  of 
a  phonograph  or  other  recording  apparatus. 

RECORDING.  The  term  applied  to  the  mechanical  account,  evi- 
dence, record  or  report  of  a  program  of  any  kind. 

REEL.  A  rotary  spool  or  frame.  The  term  for  the  unit  of  measure- 
ment applied  to  motion  picture  film.  The  standard  reel  of  16  mm. 
film  for  classroom  use  carries  four  hundred  feet  of  film. 

REPRESENTATIONAL.  The  term  used  in  art  to  describe  a 
picture  in  which  the  artist  has  depicted  people  and  objects  as  close 
to  reality  as  possible;  photographic  presentation  rather  than  im- 
aginative. 

SCREEN.  The  surface  on  which  a  slide,  motion  picture  or  other 
pictorial  image  is  projected  and  viewed.  Screens  for  school  use  are 
of  two  general  types— the  opaque  and  the  translucent.  (See  also 
Beaded  Screen,  Opaque  Screen,  Sound  Screen,  Translucent 
Screen. ) 

SILENT  FILM.  Motion  picture  film  on  which  a  series  of  pic- 
tures or  images  is  photographed  to  be  shown  at  a  rate  of  sixteen 
frames  per  second.  This  film  can  only  be  shown  on  a  projector 
geared  to  show  silent  film.  (See  also  Motion  Picture  Film  and 
Sound  Film.) 

SIXTEEN  MILLIMETER  FILM.  The  non-inflammable, 
acetate-base  film  which  has  become  standard  for  classroom  use. 
This  film  has  forty  frames  to  the  foot  and  four  hundred  feet  to  the 
standard  reel.  16  mm.  silent  film  is  projected  at  a  rate  of  sixteen 

249 


GLOSSARY 

frames  per  second;  16  mm.  somid  film  is  projected  at  a  rate  of 
twenty-four  frames  per  second.  ( See  also  Eight  Millimeter  Film, 
Thirty-five  Millimeter  Film,  Motion  Picture  Film,  Silent  Film, 
Sound  Film.) 

SLIDE  CARRIER.  That  part  of  a  lantern  slide  projector  into 
which  a  slide  is  inserted  for  projection. 

SLIDE  VIEWER.  An  instrument  or  holder  for  the  viewing  of 
individual  lantern  slides.  Usually  a  table-top  instrument  which 
gives  sufiicient  magnification  to  permit  close  examination  of  the 
slide. 

SLIDEFILM.  A  designation  frequently  used  for  filmstrip.  (See 
also  FilmsHde,  Filmstrip,  Picturol,  Stillfihn.) 

SOUND  FILM.  Motion  picture  film  with  a  band  or  "sound 
track"  along  one  edge,  produced  either  by  sound  waves  recorded 
as  the  film  is  produced  or  added  later  as  a  recorded  comment  or 
musical  accompaniment.  This  film  is  shown  at  a  rate  of  twenty- 
four  frames  per  second  on  a  projector  especially  geared  to  record 
the  sound  track.  (See  also  Eight  Millimeter  Film,  Sixteen  Milli- 
meter Film,  Thirty-five  MiUimeter  Film,  Motion  Picture  Film, 
Silent  Fihn. ) 

SOUND  SCREEN.  A  flat  white  opaque  screen  the  surface  of 
which  is  so  perforated  as  to  provide  a  surface  acoustically  adapted 
for  use  with  sound  motion  pictures.  (See  also  Beaded  Screen, 
Screen,  Opaque  Screen,  Translucent  Screen*. ) 

SOUND  SLIDEFILM.  A  combination  of  filmstrip  and  disc 
records.  Voice,  music,  or  other  sound  effects  are  reproduced  on 
disc  records  to  accompany  the  filmstrip.  Special  projector  units  are 
available  which  contain  both  the  projector  for  the  filmstrip,  a  turn- 
table for  the  record,  and  a  built-in  speaker. 

SOUND  TRACK.  The  narrow  band  which  forms  one  edge  of 
sound  motion  picture  film.  The  varying  amounts  of  light  on  this 

250 


GLOSSARY 

band,  when  reaching  the  photoelectric  cell  of  the  projector,  cause 
variations  in  current  which  in  turn  produce  sound. 

SPECIMEN.  A  single  item  or  sample  representative  of  a  class 
or  group  of  materials  or  things. 

STANDARD  LANTERN  SLIDE.  The  3)i  by  4  inch  slide  de- 
fined under  "Lantern  Slide."  Known  under  this  name,  as  these  are 
the  standard  dimensions  for  lantern  slides  in  the  United  States. 

STE  RE  OPTIC  ON.  A  projection  machine  made  especially  for 
the  projection  of  lantern  slides.  The  name  for  a  lantern  slide  pro- 
jector. 

STEREOGRAPH.  An  oblong  picture  containing  two  slightly 
dissimilar  photographs  of  the  same  object,  taken  by  a  double 
camera  with  lenses  set  at  a  distance  equal  to  the  normal  distance 
between  the  pupils  of  the  eyes.  The  picture  must  be  viewed  through 
a  stereoscope  to  obtain  the  correct  pictorial  eflFect. 

STEREOSCOPE.  A  special  optical  apparatus  or  instrument 
used  to  view  a  stereograph. 

STILLFILM.  The  trade  name  for  the  continuous  roll  of  35  mm. 
film  manufactured  by  Stillfilm,  Inc.  ( See  also  Filmslide,  Filmstrip, 
Picturol,  Slidefilm. ) 

TEXTURE.  The  appeal  to  the  sense  of  touch;  used  in  connection 
with  pictures  as  a  part  of  the  language  of  the  artist. 

THIRTY-FIVE  MILLIMETER  FILM.  The  standard  width 
film  used  in  motion  picture  theaters.  It  usually  has  a  nitrate  base 
and,  as  flammable  material,  must  be  projected  in  a  fireproof  booth, 
by  a  licensed  operator.  This  film  has  sixteen  frames  to  the  foot  and 
1000  feet  of  film  to  a  standard  reel.  35  mm.  sound  film  is  projected 
at  a  rate  of  ninety  feet  per  minute  and  the  silent  film  at  a  rate  of 
sixty  feet  per  minute.  (See  also  Eight  Millimeter  Film,  Sixteen 
Millimeter  Film,  Motion  Picture  Film,  Silent  Film,  Sound  Film. ) 

251 


GLOSSARY 

TRANSLUCENT  SCREEN.  The  screen  of  tracing  cloth, 
etched  glass  or  bleached  muslin  on  which  may  be  projected  black 
and  white  or  color  silent  motion  pictures  or  lantern  slides.  It  is 
particularly  useful  for  "daylight  projection"  use  in  a  partially  dark- 
ened room.  When  in  use  tliis  screen  is  placed  between  the  pro- 
jector and  the  group  viewing  the  picture. 

TRANSCRIPTION.  An  artificial  record  or  recording  of  a  "live" 
program. 

TWO  BY  TWO  INCH  LANTERN  SLIDE.  This  slide  is 
made  by  photographing  directly  on  black  and  white  or  color  35  mm. 
film.  This  slide  so  made  is  mounted  in  a  cardboard  mount  or 
placed  between  glass,  and  is  shown  by  means  of  a  projector  made 
to  accommodate  this  size  slide.  ( See  also  Miniature  Slide. ) 

VECTOGRAPH.  A  special  type  of  stereoscopic  photograph, 
printed  in  two  colors  or  in  black  and  white.  The  two  pictures  must 
be  printed  on  opposite  sides  of  a  polarizing  film  and  viewed  through 
polaroid  glasses  to  obtain  the  three-dimensional  effect  they  are 
designed  to  give. 

VIEW-MASTER.  A  stereoscopic  device  whereby  sets  of  stereo- 
scopic miniature  color  photographs  arranged  on  reels  may  be 
viewed  as  three-dimensional  pictures. 

VIEW-MASTER  PROJECTOR.  A  two-dimensional  projector 
especially  designed  for  the  use  of  interchangeable,  seven-scene 
View-master  picture  reels. 


252